Logo design with Inkscape

1. Start with dashboard: We are going to see how to work with the dashboard. First things to do it is to see how to work with the dashboard. When you start with the software, first, you will have on the top different tabs. First, when you go into file, you will be able to create a new document to save work, to export work, and to have access also to the document properties. Then you can go in the Edit options to, for example, have access to undo redo actions, but also you can copy and past. You can work with selection and have access to the preferences. I will explain the preferences after. Here, this is a view panel, you can display the guide, you can display also the grid. You can work as well with the navigation. In the layer, you can work with the position of the layers. You can also add layers and edit the layers. In the object, you will have different panels. You can open some panels, like, for example, layers and object fill and stroke, but I will explain just after how you can work with the panels. You can find a pass here and you can edit the pass. You have different type of Bolan operation and different type of operation. Here this is a text. You can edit the text. You can have access to a library of filters as well with a lot of type of possibilities of filters. Here, this is an extension panel, you have also different type of extension that you can use, and here it's just help panels. After that, you have a second horizontal tab here. You just have a basic things that you can use in inscapes like for example, the selection here. Then when you have, for example, an object, you can rotate or you can flip the object and you can send also the position foreground and background just here. When I go directly on the left, what I can do, I can see the different tools that we can use. This one is the tool bar just here. You have different type of tools, you can crack shape, you can work with gradient, you can draw with different type of tools. This is all the tools that you can use just here. You have one horizontal tab here and one vertical tab, it is two rulers. Thanks to that, I have a document 12600 pixel by one to 200 pixels and you can see that on the rulers here. On this area, we have the space of work, so it means I have my document. And when I just go below, I have all this tab. All the tab where we can have, we can have color panel. We have all the basic colors that we can use. Here you can define any simple color using this. When you just go just below, you have the view of what layer you use. You can change also the transparency of element. When you go on the bottom right corner, you can define a level of Zooms and you can also rotate your document. When you go totally on the right, what you can have here, this is some options about the snapping options. When you click here, you can change the snapping options so you can enable the snapping option here or you can not enable the snapping options. At the beginning, you can enable, but you can switch easily using this one. When you go totally on the right, you have one more time more options. This some basic options that you can use. When you go in file, you can create a new document, you can save and export the work, have access to the document properties, and you will find again these different type of element here. Create a new document, you can open a file, you can save again, print again. You can have access to different elements at different position on your space of work. When you just scroll down, you click on this area. As you can see, you have also more options and it is tools that you can find again, for example, you can duplicate. For example, you can Zoom Center page. You can also work with Cloud, all these type of features. We can find all these type of features in the toolbars, or for example, in the object or for example, in the edit panels, but you can have access to different features at different position on your space of work. Here, I decided to start with two panels, you'll be able to extend or to reduce here. And what I have here, you have a layer and object panels, fill and stroke panel, but here it's up to you to define what type of panels you want to have. So we are going to start with the layers and object panels, the fill and stroke panels. But if you want to place more panels, you can place more panels here and you can adjust the position of these panels as well. You can also extend this tool bar just like this, and you can redu the space of work and you can extend the tool bars on the right. Can also adjust the tool bar we explain after you clicking on this arpa and here you have the different type of panels that you can use. If you want in and distribute, you can click here. If you want to export panels, you can click here. If you want the swatch panel, you can click here. So you have different type of panels. One more time when you go here, this is a panel that you can use, but you can also one more time have access to the document properties, the object properties or the preferences from these panels. So one more time, you can have access to the same features in different area on your space of work. Example, you have five and you can find document properties here to address your document. But you can also find this one when you go here and when you go on this area, and you can find the document properties as well here. This is exactly the same panel, just that you can have access in different area on your space of work. So this is how you can start with this panel. So it's important first to have first preview of your space off work to take a look about where displays a different area because to have a first overview of the software. So extremely important to take a look to this work to see what you are on your space of work when you start. And after we show you the preferences and how you can work to position the different panel. 2. Edit preferences: We're going to see the preferences. So when you start, you can edit the preferences. It is important to take a look about the preferences. The aim is not to change all the preferences, just to take a look that you have the possibility to change the preferences. Got access to the preferences, you can go and edit here and you can select preferences. After to do this work, these panels will be open. First, you can take a look, you have the interface panels here. So you can reduce or extend here. F things to do, you can take a look about the interface. This is the most things that we can change for example. And in the interface in general, you can change, for example, the language. So on this area, I can change the language here. If I just continue, you have also a Zoom corrector factor, so we are going to keep 100, but you can change the value here. About the Tam options here, this is the I contrast tem, but you can just change. Personally, in inks cape, I prefer to work with this type of tem. So it means a clear tame. But you can adjust the tame at your convenience. So you can use a different tame. If I just continue a little bit, you have also the icon TAM, and by default, we use multicolor. So what does it mean? It means that when you take a look on this area, you have different type of color for these tools, and you have the possibility to change the color here. But definitely multicolor, in my opinion, is great. So if you prefer to work with a team in black, you can work with a team in black, but in the kiosk, we will work with this bright tem. Personally, I prefer in inks cape to work with a bright tem just here. You can change the type of tem that you want on this area. The icon in the menu will depend on the tem. So here, I'm going to keep the tem decide here and the color because the color tame is inscape light, but you can change also at your convenience. About the tool bars, as you can see, the tool bars are separate in different categories here. We're going to keep this categorize and you have the Cilic categorize, the shape categorize, creating you categorize, color and style categorize, order categorize and Canva tool categorize. When you switch to the window here, we're not going to change anything, just information about the window size and position and more. You have also a color selector. So when we go in the fill and stroke options, you will have a color selector, and by default, we use this one. But you can switch the color selector at your convenience when you are on this area. So you can define what you want by default, and if you want to change when you go in, for example, the fill and stroke, you will be able to change. You can display the grid, and the grid we can find a minor grid line color and a major grid line color. So the color will appear on this area, and we will have a grid with a space of one by default, and we have three type of grid just like this. I will explain more in detail how you can adjust the grid when we will work with the grid. So here we're not going to change anything, just information about how to edit the grid. Common palettes and also keyboard you can find on the keyboard different information about, for example, the shortcut and what you can do with this. Here is some behavior. So concretely, you have a lot of type of option here. It's not really useful to change the different option. We are going to keep this by default. But sometime you have something like, for example, deselect change or select the top most ITM only when it choose selection mode. So we have all these type of things by default. It will be too difficult to change and to adjust these different element. So we'll keep this one by default. Input input panels here, just information about, for example, the color management, autosave options. You have also the system here. And it is just information about where you are going to use your software on your computer, imported images, rendering and here spell check. If I just come back here, you can reduce at any moment the different elements. So it means you can extend and you can reduce here. The most important things in this case will be in the interface. And if you want to adjust your time, you want to adjust the toolbar and more and you want to work with the grid, you will be able to edit this in the preferences and the interface. Now if I just take a look, you can also go on the right. You can also have access to the preferences when you go in these panels. And in these panels, you will have also the preferences here. And when you click on this at same, you can also have access to the preferences from these panels and one more time, I can switch again with the interface if I need. So two way to have access to the preferences, you can go in the file option here. You can go in the edit option here. You can click on the preferences just like that. So you can have access to the preferences from these panels. And the second way will be to go on the right. And when you go on the right, you can also have access to the preferences here. You have also the preferences when you click here, so preferences. But even on this area, you can click on this area and you can also have access to the preferences from these panels. One more time, you can see the same features accessible in different way. So accessible here. And you can see the same pictures also accessible when you go not on this area, when you go on this area, and you can have access also to the document properties. This one is a document properties that will explain after when we create a new document, and when you go here, this is the preferences and you can edit the preferences as well when you go on this area. 3. Edit windows: We are going to see how to edit panels. And for this, something that we can do when we go on the right, as you can see, we can display panels. So I decided to display the an object and fill and strap panels by default here. But you can adjust this element. Concretely, where you can find this type of panels, you have different type of options. First, if I close the panels, I can click here and I can close these panels. As you can see, you can extend to have all your document on this area. Now if I want to display panels, I have two options. The first option is when, for example, you go on object, you can display different type of panels. One more time layer an object. And when I click here, automatically the panels will be open on the right. But you have more options. For example, you can display the fill and stroke, just like this. You can also have the object property panels. And you can have more options as well. I can continue to object. If you want to adding and distribute, you can click on Adding and distribute. And all these panels will be located on this area. So you can have access after that to these different panels here. You select a panel, you can also go left click and you can go out. And for example, you can put the panels outside and you can also work with the panels in where you want, just like that. You can change the position of your panels at your convenience. Adding the distribute panels will be convenient as well. So if you want to keep this one here, you can keep this one here, but you have also the possibility to open these panels at any moment if you need. If you want to remove this panel, you can just click here. This panels is the object property. If I want to remove, I can click here as well. You have also the possibility to extend, so it means you can reduce here and extend. If you redo, you will have you won't have the title, so it means if you redo this, you will just see as you can see the icon, but you are not going to see all the text, but if you extend like this, you will see also the text of the panels appearing. So first, when you go on different area, just like that, for example, in the object, you can open different panels like layer object plantro object property symbol, pin server, selectors or you can find also transform and halign and distribute here. You can also adjust these panels from here when you click on this a, all the basic things that you have, you have this categorize. This is a basic categorize. And you can also use the panels from this. For example, I can click on Aline and distribute, and I can play the panels for example, on this area. But if you want to play the panels, as you can see here in this case, it's not extremely convenient, but you don't need to put this one here. You need to pull from this area. And when you pull from this area, as you can see, you can play the panels, for example, here, and now I have line and distribute on this area. This is how you can place the panels. Have also the possibility to click here, so all the panels that you can use will arrive on this area. If for example, I want to display something like swatches, I will define swatches here. And after to define stretches, these panels will be located here as well. One more time I can also go out with the panels and the panels will appear on this area. So you can dragging and moving the panels outside just like this, as you can see. And when you click here, you can close the current tab, close the panels, move the tab to the new window. So I'm not going to show you all the panels. But when you click here, you have basic panels and advanced panels. So all these are just panels that you can open temporarily or that you can place on this area. To work with this. Some panels are very important, like, for example, your object or feeling struck because you use this every time. But some panels, you are not going to use a lot, so it depends. You can just open if really you need panels, for example. That is something important. So basic panels, advanced panel, you can even into setting panels, you can also put the object properties from this area as well. If you here, you can close the panel, the active panels on this area. But you have also close the current tab. So if you click on close the current tab, you can close this one and you have also close the panel just here. So when you start by default, maybe you won't have any panels. When you start by default, you will be like this. So definitely, you can also go on the right as well. You can just click on this area. This area is a little bit different. It is a display mode. So when you go on the right here, you can adjust the display mode. By default, we use normals, but you can change the display mode. When you click here, it will be the snapping option panels. And when you go on this area, this is another option that you can use. And one more time even from this, you have also the possibility to open. For example, I can click on layers and object here, and I can also have access to this panel from here. It is the same I can find on this area some aligna distribute panels, and it will be open here and I can maybe dragging and moving here as well. So what we will do for the cures because by default, if I close this, by default, and I close this, I won't have anything. So what we do for the cures will go in these panels will go in object. I will apply layers and object. So we'll open these panels. I will extend a little bit here, and I will open also the fill and stroke panel. So this is the two panels that we will keep every time on this area. After that, if we need, we can open panels when we need. So for this, we'll go on this area, and if we need a specific panels, we'll just open the panel temporarily. So this is the type of things that we can do. 4. Create document: We are going to see how to create a new document. To create a new document, we can go in file here and you can create a new document. So when I go on this area, I can click on new and automatically, I will create a new window with a new document, and we will have by default this A four pages. Now, how you can edit the size of this document. To edit the size, you can go in file on this area and you have the possibility to select the document properties. The document properties, you can have access to the display options. And by default, we have the A four. You have multiple types of predefined templates that you can use, and you can even have to others. And when you go on others, you have also all these types of template it means you want to create something like a banners or something for video or something for arch. You have different type of template. If for example, I want to create something like maybe I will switch for IO here. I want to create a two document. I can select A two document just on this area. And you can also switch here the orientation. So it means the orientation is by default portrait. But we can work with landscape as well. And you can see the preview on this area. And if I just click here, as you can see, I'm going to zoom out and you can craft a two document. You can see the dimension here and the dimension here. When I come back to the document properties, the rulers that you display here will be the display unit. It means you can create a new document with unit like for example, centimeter, millimeters, inches or you can even create in pixels, but you have also the display unit. So for example, I will come back to something like A four document. I will be able to go here, select AF document and switch, for example, to landscape. And here it is in millimeter, and you have the display unit in millimeter. So it means when you take a look on the ruler here, the display is in millimeters. Now if I just go here, I select the document properties. In the document properties, you can also change the unit, and you can, for example, work in pixels, but you can also switch here. So if I define pixels here and pixels here, I just go out, and as you can see, now the ruler will appear in pixels on this area, and the ruler will appear in pixels. And if you create any object or anything like this, you will be displayed in pixels. So it's important to understand these document properties with the format and the display unit. If you want to here you have a view box, it's something a little bit specific, so it means you can increase, for example, your area of work with a view box. You can also switch for Custom. So when you go here, you can select customs. And when you click on Custom, you can enter the dimension that you want. For example, in the cures in the different example, when we reduce the tools or different features, I created a new document with 1,600 and here 1,200, for example. And if I just go here, I will validate. We will work with pixels for the format and the display unit in pixels as well. And when I click here, I will start with a new document in pixels. If you want to switch in portrait, you can go into document properties, and you will be able to switch to portray. And when I go here, I can switch my document to portrait. I will come back to file. I will select one more time the document properties just here, and something that I will do it is to adjust the display value. And when you go in the display, you have page here. You can start with a background color as well. So for example, if I want to start with something in blue, you can see the display directly. I will come back to this value to the orientation landscape, and you can start with color background. Sometimes it is useful. So thanks to that, you don't need to create something like a rectangle with a color on the backgrounds. So file document properties, and you can define a color on the backgrounds. You can also even add borders just like this. So you can even add a border. So what does it mean if you increase, you have the view box here. And as you can see, you can define a value. On this area. So this one will be the value. You have the borders, and you can activate the checkerboard as well if you want to have some transparencies. And when I click here, you can see the red color appearing with the shadows on this area. So find document properties. So this one is the borders, and you can even change the color on the backgrounds on your page. So we have this document with this type of page, and you can also change the color on the background just like this. You can create the contra that you want when you create a new document just like that. So each time you go in find, you can have access to the document properties, and you can adjust what you need. You have also the possibility when you go on the right here, you can click on this area, and you can have access also to the document properties as well. You can do also more things from this document property. You can, for example, go in guide. You can show the guide here and possibility to create guide around the current pages or to delete all guides. But I will show you when we will work with guide exactly how to process. It is same for the grid. You can define a grid and I will explain more in details after how you can edit this grid. You can have also access to color, scripting, metadata and license. So metadata can be sometime interesting. If you work for you, it's definitely not very useful. But if you work with something like a project that you want to share professional project, you can enter some titles, the date, the creation, the writes, the publisher, source, keywords and things. Thanks to that, when you export your work, the different metadata property will be exported as well, and sometimes it is useful in the professional way. When I come back here, this is a display feature. So what we will do for curse, I'm going to click here and close close without saving just like this. And when I go in this area, we will start with this type of document. So I will go in the file options. I will define the document properties just here. And in the document property, we will start with the document with a white of 1608 of 1,200. So orientation will be in landscape like this, and we will start with wise backgrounds first. So type this type of document will be our reference for the cures. And if we need to change, we can change at our convenience at any moment in these properties. 5. Master navigation: We're going to see the navigation, extremely important to understand the navigation. The first thing that I'm going to do is to create a rectangle. For this, I will select the rectangle tools, and I will go left click here to define rectangles. And this rectangle, as you can see, when I go on the fill and stroke panels, I have fill and stroke here. So concretely on the fill, I will fill my rectangle and I will remove the stroke. When I go and stroke paint, I can click on no paint. And when I go on the field options value, I can activate a color, and from the color wheel, I can define a color just on this area, but you can also define a color on this with the different color option that we have. So we have this rectangle. Now I will come back to the selection tools. How we can process for the navigation. First, the navigation, if you want to make something fast using the mouse. So when you use the mouse, concretely, if you want to zoom in Zoom out, you need to press control on the keyboard and dragging and moving the scroll wheel. If you press control and you drag and move the scroll wheel, you will be able to zoom in and zoom out. If I want to zoom more on this corner, I will place my cursor here and control and the scroll wheel to zoom more on this area. I want to zoom more here, will place my cursor on this area, and with the scroll wheel, I will be able to zoom in and zoom out. After to understand that, you have also the possibility to move. And for this, you can click on the scroll wheel and when you click on the scroll wheel, you can move like this. So for example, I can zoom on this area. And if I want them to move, I can click on the scroll wheel, and as you can see, you can move like that. When you go right click, you will have access to just some properties. So right click here, you only have pass and document properties. But if you have an object selected, like, for example, the rectangle, you will use Right Click, you will have different type of option, like for example, copy and past, you can duplicate, you can create a clone, you can delete, or you can even have access to the layer and object properties or object properties or fill in stroke panels using the Right click as well. So different type of option when you have selected an element. You also has a navigation you can click here. And with this one, you can move vertically. And when you click here, you can move also horizontally. Move vertically and move horizontally from these panels. Now you can find more options. When you go on the bottom right corner, you can define a level of Zoom. So if you want to specific level of Zoom, you can also go on the right just here and you can adjust with a level of Zooms as you can see. You can even have a rotation and you can turn your document with a rotation just like this on this direction or on this direction. So possibility to create some rotation on your document using these options as you can see. I'm going to come back with zero degrades. We don't use this too much, but sometimes it can be useful. Let's continue about the navigation. Something that you can do as well if you go on the top here. When you go on the top, you will have different type of options. And what you can have you have this panel. This is when you go in this area, you have the view panels. And the view panels, you can also zoom in or shortcut plus, and you can zoom in also here or Zoom out just like this. And you can define different level of om You have also the shortcut. For example, when you click on one here, you will have the Zoom one to one. When you go in one for two, you can also in the Zoom option for one. So different type of zoom that you can use. You can also zoom to the drawing, for example, like this. You have also the possibility to zoom to the page to zoom to the page just like this. You will have also the possibility to zoom to the page wide, and then you can also zoom when you go in the panels to the center page. If for example, you have a selection, I'm going to reduce these rectangles just like that, and I create another rectangle here, I will define a color. If for example, I select this rectangle, this rectangle is selective. And something that I can do it is to go on the view panels, and you have the possibility in the Zoom options to define Zoom to selection or shortcut sweep. And when I click here, as you can see, I can zoom to the selection directly. So it means to this rectangle. There's also the possibility in the Zoom options, you can also zoom previous, so the previous zoom and you have also the possibility to use the Zoom next. Sometimes it is useful. We don't use all the option too much. You need to understand to keep in mind that when you want to zoom in, you press control and the scroll wheel to zoom in Zoom out, when you click on the scroll wheel, you can dragging and moving at your convenience, just like that. And you have also these vertical tabs that you can use and these horizontal tabs that you can use. You even have a tool. So when you go on the left here, you can also have access to the Zoom tools. And when you click on the Zoom tools, you have different options. One more time, you can zoom here and you can zoom out. You will find again all the things that we see in the view options. So in the view options, you can find Zoom and you have these different type of options. And it is the same. You can define one for one, one for two, two for one. You can also zoom to the selection. So it means if one more time I Cilic for example, this time green rectangles, I define the Zoom tools, you can also zoom to selection as you can see. All the things that we have, we can find here again as you can see. You go on view here, and when you go on view, you have a different type of options, and all these type of options will appear when you click also on the Zoom tools. But personally, we don't use too ch Zoom tool for a simple reason that you need to switch for these tools and come back to another tool. Generally, we use a scroll wheel, it's pretty much better. Well, let's select this rectangle press delete, this rectangle press delete, and this is how to work with the navigation. 6. Master selections: We are going to see how to work with selections. For this to work with selection, something that we are going to do it is first to select the rectangle tools. With the rectangle tools, I will create a first rectangle on this area and I will define a color from the panels, for example, the blue color. Then we will create an order rectangles. I will go here and I will define the red colors. Then I will create anoer one, I will define maybe the yellow colors and another one here, and I will put the green colors. So I have four rectangle, let's just with a selection tool change little bit the selections. So the selection tool is this one. So first, when you deselect, you have different options. To deselect, you can press cap, and thanks to that, you can dislectO when, for example, I have this object selected, you can click outside and you can deselect as well. To select the object, you can go left click and the object will be selected. When you just go one left click, you can dragging and moving the object. You have also access to the different handle to, for example, resize the object at your convenience on the different size. If you want to keep the proportion, you can press control. And when you press Control, you can keep the proportion of your object when you want to resize. Now, if you click again, you click one more time. Left click again. You have access to other options like, for example, the rotation, just like this. And you can also press Control to constraint to different value of degrees. If you want to turn 45 degrees or 90 degrees, you can press control, and thanks to that, you can apply constraint. You can also, when you go in this area, you can use what we call her and you can share object when you go here or on this direction when you go here as well. So it is another type of options. You can also do this. So one left click you can scale, a second left click, you can rotate and her. You can even change the transformation point if you want to change the transformation point, for example, for the rotation, you can move the transformation point. By default, it is in the middle of the object, so you can change the rotation point. Let's come back more to the selection. You can craft a selection like this, but don't forget you have also a layer and object panels, and you can also select from these panels. So now we can how we can select multiple objects at the same time. If, for example, I want to select to object, I will click on the blue rectangle, press Control and click on the press Shift and click on the yellow rectangle. So with control, you can select multiple shapes at the same time. I can click on the blue one, press shift, select the red one, press shift, select the green one, and press shift, select the yellow one. And thanks to that, the four rectangle are selected and I can do the same thing. I can move I can, for example, scale, and if I use control, I can keep. And if I left click again, I can also rotate or use the share options as well. Now when you go on this area, you can find also select or Control A. Select, you can select all the object in your layers. When you go on this area, you can select all in all layers. So if you have multiple layers, you can select all in all the layers. Here you have di select and Togle selection ball to select all the object. If I select, just like that, I can dslect as well clicking on this area. Why you have Toggle selection ball to select all touch object? Because by default, if you create a frame of selection, you can create a frame of selection. Left click and you can create a frame of selection like this. And as you can see, I selected these two object. Now why you have here for a simple reason that when, for example, you touch an object, it's not going to be selected. And in most of the software, you need to be all around the object to be able to select. And if you prefer only to touch, you can switch here for Togal selection ball to select all touch object. And in this case, if you just touch the object, as you can see, it will be selected here, just touch and it will be selected. And sometimes it can be convenient, even if honestly, I prefer to be around all the object, but sometimes it can be convenient because you can, for example, have something like this. And if you only touch the object, I will select, for example, the yellow one and the blue. But if I deactivate this one, I want to select the yellow and the blue one. I need to crat something like this, but the red one will be selected as well. But if I click here, I can select the blue one and the yellow one just doing this type of work. This is why sometimes it can be useful to switch toggle selection box using this one. I'm going to go back here. I'm going to click on the blue rectangles and adjust and move the red one just on this area. So now what we can do when you go on the Edit panels here, you can find again this type of options. Select All, select all layers and slc SAM. CelcSAM can be pretty convenient. For example, you can select by fill and stroke. So if, for example, these blue rectangles, I define I recuperate the colors, I can click here and recuperate the green color. So this rectangle have the same color. So when you go select this green rectangle, you go in the edit panels. You can, for example, use Clic SEM and Clic for example, by color. And as you can see, these two rectangle will be selected because they have the same color. If I click on this red rectangle, I can go in the edit options, and here you can find select SEM. And it can be, for example, the object type. And if you have a rectangle, a circle or something like this, as you can see, because all these elements are rectangles, they will be selected because this is the same type of object. So this is how you can do. So you have different type of option of selection here as well. Select all in layers. Select Same, and you can select by fill and stroke by fill and color, by stroke colors, by stroke style and by object types. Sometimes it can be useful. Not a lot, but sometimes it can be useful and interesting, you can select, for example, in different area, some element with the same color or the same stroke or as you can see the object type as well. You can also invert the selection here and you can also diselect as well. But as I explained, you can click outside, or you can click on Escape also when you want to deselect. So multiple way to select one more time. You can also select from the panel layer panel, so I can go left click and when I go Left click, I can select an element here. And when you are in the layer panel, it is the same. You can press here Control. And when you press Control, you can select multiple layers. And here, for example, I selected these two rectangle, not multiple layer, multiple object, but also multiple layers. If I click on this rectangle and I click on this one with Control, these 21 will be selected. But if I want to select all the object in the layer panel from the first to the last one, you can select the first one. And on the last one, you press shift at the same time and all the layers between the first one and the second one will be selected when you press shift. In this case, as you can see, all the rectangle has been selected. All the rectangle has been selected here. This is something that we can do. So different way one more time to select. Let's just click on this area, we select and I will press delete on the keyboard. 7. Create rectangles: We are going to see how to create rectangles. For this, we can use this tool. This is the rectangle tools and you can create rectangle. First things to do, I'm going to zoom here to create a rectangle, left click, you can stay left click and you can dragging and moving to create a rectangle. Then when you stop the left click, automatically, you will have access to different things. So concretely with this point, you can move just like that. With this point, you can move as well. And here you can add wounded corner. So thanks to that, you can also add wounded corner for your rectangle using this point. After to understand that, you can switch for the selection tools, and with the selection tools, I'm going to seek the rectangle and just before to make some transformation, you can fill your rectangle with any color located on the bottom area, just like that. You can also use fill and stroke panels. You will be able to fill with a color from these panels, just like this. And if you want to add a stroke, you will switch for stroke paint. And when you are on stroke paint, you can activate a stroke with a flat color. You have also some gradient color, but I will explain more in details when we will work with gradient. So here you can apply a flat colors. You define the color that you want for the stroke just like this. If I want to increase the stroke paint, I can click on the stroke style options, and here you can define the size of the stroke and you can if you need increase the value. This one is the size of the stroke, just like that. Now, something that I'm going to do if you want to remove, you can also remove the color, you go to fill options and you can remove the color and only keep the stroke as you can see. I'm going to come back here with a color and stroke paint, I'm going to remove the stroke. Let's apply the red color. When you have an object like this, you use your selection tool, left click. And when you use one left click, you can scale your rectangle at your convenience, just like this. You can also, if you want to keep the proportion, press control, and you can keep the proportion. If you want to rotate or chill, you just go left click again. And when you go left click, you can create rotation for, for example, your rectangle. And if you press control, you can directly with control, apply some constraints as you can see. After that, you can also chair, so it means you can use this one or use this one if you need. One more time depending on the transformation point. Let's undo this action and undo this action. If the transformation point is located here, you will turn around this transformation point, as you can see. But if the transformation point, you can snap again to the object in the center because we use the snapping options on the right. You can turn around this center point, just like that. Now I'm going to place the rectangle here, left click again, and I will scale little bit. Something that you can do also when you create rectangles. You have access directly to some information on the top, so it means the tool option. If I create another rectangle here, you have access to the w and you can enter specific value. If my rectangle around 600 I'm working in pixel here and 400, I can tap this value and directly, I will have some specific value. It is same, you can also work with this. This one is to have access to rounded corners and you can enter a value for rounded corners. And something interesting, you can work with, for example, two value in this case. If I apply 100, let's just apply, yes. Yes, let's just apply 100 here. And on the other side, I can apply another value, like, for example, 40, and you can create more specific rounded corner. Yes, this is a unit, and you can come back at any moment with this value. So this is why it can be pretty convenient to use this option because you can break the proportion of the rounded corner. When you select the tool, this is not tools. You will have one more time access to these handles and one more time to this handle and this handle when you use the not tools. I will explain after that you have the possibility to convert to pass, and in this case, it will be different if you convert an element to a pass, just like this. If for example, I want to create a rectangle on the back, I will select the rectangle and I will press delete on the keyboard. I will click on the rectangle tools. I will go on the right here and you can snap. You can snap, for example, enable the snapping to, for example, the page border and the page margins here. When you activate this one with enabled snapping option, you can snap to the page corner as you can see, I can go left click to create a Rectangle on the back. I will define a color like for example, some blue color. I will define this blue color, and I can create a rectangle like this. Then I will select the rectangle tools one more time, and I will create another ones on these directions, and I will adjust with maybe another type of color just like this. As you can see, I can create another rectangle here. I will create anoorRctangle two, I will snap to this one until this one, and I will adjust a little bit the green color. Let's work more with maybe this type of green color, and I will deselect here. And I will create ano DR one. I will snap to this corner, create anoor one, and I will adjust with another type of color as well. As you can see, I created multiple rectangles, then you can see the rectangle adjust. Here, as you can see we snap on this area because we have the snapping option activated. Sometimes it's not extremely convenient. Regularly, you will have to deactivate the snapping options and thanks to that, I can now move freely my rectangles as you can see, just like that. This is the type of things that we can do if you need to create rectangle. Let's select all the rectangle here and press delete on the keyboard. 8. Create circles: We're going to see how to create circles. And for this, we can click on the circle tools. And with the circle tools, you can start to circle or create ellipse with left click and you can dragging and moving. Then the circles, if you click on the selection tools, you will have access to the same type of options and the rectangle. So you can resize your circle with a different handles. You can also press Control if you want to resize proportionally. And if you use Left click again, you will have access to the rotation. And you can turn like this, as you can see, and you can press control if you want to keep the proportion. You can also change the transformation point if you want to turn in a different way in your space off work. You can also take your transformation print, and if you want to snap again in the center, you can reactivate, for example, the snapping options, and now I can snap to the center of my object just like this. This is the type of thing that you can do. This element as well, you will have the possibility to go on the right. Fill and stroke panel. So in the fill and stroke panel, you can fill with a color, so you can here we are in the stroke, so you can add a stroke just like this. You can define the stroke value, and I have the possibility in the stroke style to increase the value here. So it means we can increase the size of the stroke on the right, just like this. I want to come back with an er value, I will just come back with, for example, value of four. If I want to remove the struck paint, I will click here and I will remove. You can go also on the field options, and on the field, you can select another color on the color wheel as well, just like this. The different element you can also use use saturation luminosity and the transparency also if you want to address the color, but I will show you more in details when we will work with the colors just like that. If now you want to create a perfect circle, first, I will delete this one, and I will select the circle tool again and don't forget that you have the option of the tool on the top. So if, for example, I start to ellipse just like this, I can adjust and define my X radius. So for example, I can define 400 and here my order radius. For example, I can define 300. Have the possibility when you are still with these tools to dragging and moving this handle to open, as you can see. So you can open dragging these handles. You can also take these handles to extend on this area, depending on what you choose here. So it means you can choose switch to arc close like this, switch to course, close shapes, or you can just come back with your ellipse just like this. It will depend if you have a stroke or not. If for example, you use fiel, you deactivate the color, you use stroke and activate the stroke like this. As you can see if you open, you will obtain the surrender. And you can switch for unclosed shapes just like this to open like this or closed shapes to have this line on this area. And you can come back to your ellipse just like this. And this is why you can also define star value and value here as well. Now I will deactivate the stroke paint, I will come back to the field and I will define color just like this. I will select my ellipse and I will press delete. If you want to create a perfect circles. So it means with the right ratio. You can click on the circle too, you can press Control. And when you press Control, you can just create a circle with the ratio, just like this. And we have the same Xradis and Y radius. You can also start from the center with shift and control. So if you press Shift, you can create a circle from the center from your center point and control to keep the ratio as well, just like this. I'm going to remove this circle and remove this one as well. So something that we can do when you go into snapping options. In the snapping option on this area, you can, for example, use some different midpoint, you have also the page borders here that you can snap and something interesting, you have order point, object midpoint, and more things. But if I enable this different snapping option and I click on the circle tools, as you can see, you can snap to the center of your page. For example, here, I can snap to the center of my page. Can press Shift to start from the center, my circle and control if I want to keep the ratio. I can create something like this. I will define, for example, color, and I will obtain this render. Then I will deselect, for example, and I will define another color like maybe the green color. I will select the circle tool. I will snap again to the center point and I will press Shift and control to keep the ratio and create another one. Then I will click here and deselect. I will define another color like the yellow colors and I will click on my circles. I will snap to the center point and shift and control to start from the center and create another circle maybe like this. I will click here and I will deselect again. As you can see, each time you can snap to the center here. And if you press shift and control, you can not only create a circle with the same ratio on the white and the eight, but also start from the center. I will click for the circle tools. I will define another color first like the blue color and I can snap again here, shift control, and I can create another circle. And all my circle here are perfectly in the center, as you can see. But if you want to break the ratio, for example, I can click here on this one, as you can see, break the ratio again, and I can place my element in the center. I can maybe extend here. Sometimes it's not convenient because you have the snapping option, you can temporarily deactivate the snapping options. And you can also if you press shift, you can also scale on the left and the right at the same time. Because I press shift, I can go into two sides at the same time. And here, if I press shift, I can go into two sides at the same time as well. And sometime it is convenient also to shift when you want to scale. So this is how we can create circles. 9. Create polygons: We are going to see how to create polygons. And for this, we can use these tools and we can create polygons with the polygon tools, and you can create also stars. When I click on this area, the first thing that you can do it is to define the mode. So you have the regular polygons, and you have also the stars mode. If I select the regular polygons, you can define the number of corners that you want. And now you can just go left click and you can create polygons. But as you can see from these polygons, why ot this render because I have a random value, and this one is a random value. So if for example, I deactivate the wounded value here and the random value as well, I'm not going to have rounded corner, but this type of polygons, just like this. So I'm going to show you again, I will click on my polygon tools and I will press Control if you press Control, you can snap and you can go, for example, to place the corner on the top or on the side depending on what you use. So you can press control if you need. And I created this first polygon. I have six side. I can still edit the option value and if you want to change the number of side to create, for example, a triangle is possible, but you can also increase the number of side just like this. These polygons, when you click on this area, you have this point and this point, you can just turn the polygons at your convenience just like this. If you select the selection tools, one more time, it is same. You can scale your polygons. You can also break the ratio. You can press control if you want to keep the ratio. And if you go left click again, you have also access to the rotate tools and more. Oh, this is the type of thing that you can. One more time, it is same. You can go in the fill and stroke panels. You can adjust also with color, so you can fill with a color. You can also adjust with a stroke and activate, for example, stroke paint, and you can define a stroke as well and define in the stroke style, the value that you want or the stroke, for example. I just click on the stroke and just remove here, and this is how you can create the polygons. Why you have a random value? Because when I click on this area, if, for example, create a polygon just like this, these polygons, after that, you can apply rounded corner. Here you can define some rounded corner for your polygons. It's possible. You can also go in a negative value, and if you apply a negative value, you will obtain this type of render. Here it is rounded corners. You can also use a randomized value, and sometimes it's pretty convenient because you can deform like this, your element. And if you add rounded corner, you will upturn this type of things as you can see. So you can apply random, and it can be pretty convenient sometimes, and you can mix wounded and random value as well. And let's take little bit value, not too much maybe around this one and little bit rounded corners. And as you can see, I can crat this type of shapes in a fast and efficient way thanks to these tools. If you want to create stars, you can click on the star tools. You can click on the polygon tools, and you just need to switch here. You have the regular polygons, and you can select the star polygons. One more time, you can define a number of corners. If I define eight corners, you can also activate the stroke, activate the snapping options, and you can snap to the center if you need. After to snap to the center, I can create my stars. But here, as you can see one more time, I have a random values. I'm going to click on Undo and I will click on the start stools. I will define corners like eight corners. But I will start with round zero and Random I zero. And I can just snap to my center point, and here one more time, I have the random value. I will press shift to do something like this. And as you can see, I will come back to zero here. So on this area, I will tape zero. On this area, I will tape zero as well. And for the ratio here, if you tape zero, you won't have anything because you can start your stars just like this until one, and this is the ratio that you can use between the corner point and the inside value of the stars. And you can adjust just like this using this ratio. But you have another way to adjust. You can just click on this point and you can also adjust with this point, can also click on this point, and you can also turn like this, as you can see. Now if I apply as well randomized value, I can click on Randomize just like this, and I can mix also with rounded corners, and this is where you can deform your stars and you can make something little bit different one more times. This is how we can work. So let's create polygons. I will select the polygon tools. I will just click here. I will define some rounded value. I will go back with a value of zero. And for the randomized value, I will apply also zero. I will select the polygons and I will define corner eight, I will snap to the center point. And on this area, I will press control to place my element just like this. Then I will go in the field options and I will define some color for example, this blue color. I will create anoer one. I will go in the option of the tools, and here we have eight. First, I will deselect my polygons and I will come back with these tools. I will create an oder one, I will decrease the number of corners of six, and I will snap inside. Maybe we define another color like the yellow colors, and I will snap inside just like that. And I will press Control to, for example, create something like this. If I want one more time to adjust, I can just turn like this. If I want to turn, as you can see, hoops. And if I want to add rounded corners, I can also apply some rounded corners value, as you can see using these tools, and sometimes it can be pretty convenient. And I will obtain, for example, this render just like that. I can also select two entities. I can press Control to scale, and if I press control shift, I will be able to scale from the center point, as you can see. So this is how you can create polygons as well as you can create stars. 10. Create spirals: We're going to see how to create spirals. And for this, we can use these tools. And with the spiral tools, you have the possibility to create spirals. And you can start with a first point. I can, for example, snap to the center if I need, but you can also start from any point. And if you press Left click here, you can create your spirals. You have the possibility to stop the left click and you can do something like this. The first things to understand is when I zoom a little bit here, you can change the number of turns. Concretely, from the center until here, you can define the number of turns. If for example, I define four, I will have four turns, as you can see. If I increase, I define something like eight, I will have eight turns. Also the divergence value. The divergence value is the number of space starting from the center. So it means here we can have more space and less space between each line as you can see, and you can adjust the divergence. You can also come back more near the center here and finally have more space at this area and less space on this area. Then you have the inner radius. You can also adjust the inner radius. If you don't want to start do like this, you can switch until 0.999, and as you can see, you can start your turn likes using the inner radius. And if you increase until, for example, a value of zero, you can tap zero, you will start perfectly in the center perfectly with a small turn on this area. So you can adjust little bit inner radius if you need, as you can see. After to understand this type of work, you have the possibility if you feel. It's not very interesting in this case, generally to feel this type of element. If you select fill and stroke here, you define a color, as you can see, it will be fill like this. So you can define any color. Generally, when you work with a spiral, generally, you work with a stroke and you don't use too much fill. Sometimes you can fill, but most of the time you will only use a stroke. So for example, I will deactivate the color here, and after to deactivate the color, I will activate the stroke pain in the stroke pain we can click on this area. Then we can adjust with a stroke color. I can come back with a black color, for example, in the stroke style value, I will be able to define a size. And as you can see, you can create something like this, for example, this element. If I'm redirected with a selection tool with a selection tools, one more time, you will be able to scale, and you can keep the proportion with control. For example, if left click again, you can, for example, one more time, you can turn your element, as you can see. Something that you can do also if you use the tool, so it means not tools, you have the possibility to have access to the first handle to the pass and the last handle to the pass, and you can adjust after with these tools and you can adjust your term just like this. You can also select this one and adjust the base and the final point just like that. After that, you can also use Not tools. It can be pretty convenient if you want to adjust like this. I'm going to select here and press delete on the keyboard. This is how you can create spirals. I will click one more time on the spiral tools. If I want to start from the centers, one more time, you can go on the right and you have the different snapping options. Here, I expect few element, I decided to snap in almost all the elements. So you can activate, for example, enable snapping, just clicking here, and it means I can find my center point. One more time, we have the different options on the top. You can also define the option first if you need. Maybe I can come back to a divergence of zero, and the inner radius, maybe I will start with 0.2. After to do this work, I will start also with a number of turn of eight. And if I just snap to the center point just like this, I will go left click here and I can start my spirals. If you press shift, you can define the directions and I will do something like this. As you can see, because the divergence is at zero will otur almost like a circle because all the line will be on the same area. Now if I apply some divergence, you can see the difference just like this. This is why the divergence can be pretty and testing. And you can also increase the divergence with higher value. Let's, for example, work with two, one more time inner radius. So you can change your starting point, location of your starting point with inner radius. I will start in this example with 0.4. And here you can change one more times the number of turns, and as you can see, it will impact directly your spirals as well. So what I will select as a turn, you can also put higher value. You can make the number of turns that you need. In this case, I will come back with, for example, eight turns. I type a value of eight. After two this type of work. I define my turns, my divergence, my inner radius if I'm satisfied. I can also go back to the selection tools. If you want to adjust after, you can click on the not tools, left click on the pass. And if you want to adjust after, as you can see, you can adjust the first point, and you can adjust or if you prefer the last point and the starting point just like this. So I can adjust after if I need just like that. After to do this type of work, I have also the possibility to apply a stroke. I will come back to my selection tools, layers object, fill and stroke. In the fill options, you can fill with a color, but most of the time you will use a strap paint, and in this case, I will activate stroke paint. I can also change the color will define, for example, some red colors, and in the strop style options, I will increase the value a little bit. And what I will use, I will use, for example, a value of maybe I will type 12 in this case, and I created my spiral just like that. So one more time, convenient tools. If you need to create a spiral, you can use this tool. 11. Create boxes: We are going to see how to create boxes. And for this, we can use these tools, and thanks to that, we can create boxes. This is D box tools. So you can work in three dimension using these tools. I will click on this area. And the first thing that I'm going to do is to go left click and I can stay left click like that. And depending on the direction, you can also have just stop the left click and you will be able to create something like this. So after to do this type of work, what you can have, you can just have access to different handle to work with a perspective. For example, I have this handle and I can change the location of this one. I can also extend outside if I need. I have then this one and I can dragging and moving. I can also extend outside if I need. And something that we can do now you can take this handle and you can move like this, and you can take this one and you can move like this as well to change the perspective. But you can also take this type of point to adjust on this dimension on this direction or on this direction. And if you adjust here, you will see just the element on the base just like that. And if, for example, you decide to maybe dragging and moving this print, you will be able to see the element on the top, as well. So it means this side. So you can have multiple side at the same time. If, for example, you have satisfied, you create your box, you work like this, and you just want to validate. So I can just press Enter and come back to my selection tools. And as you can see, I created this element. Now, if I go into layer object, you will have a group created and you have multiple pass here. So why you have multiple pass for a simple reason that I'm going to show you. If you double click here, not double click, if you select, for example, the node tools, you can just with the node tools when you click on this area, you can just see only one element selected, so it means only one pass. Concretely, if I deactivate the preview here of this different element, you will be able to see the different elements. So for example, we have this pass. We have this one, we have this one, we have this one, we have this one, and we have this one. So we have also the different element of the boxes. And in this case, we have six sites totally. You can click on one of element. You can change the color. For example, I can define the red color here, and for this one, I can define, for example, this type of red color. But if you adjust, you can also with a section tools, you can select all the elements here, but you can also double click and when you double click, you can edit again. And when you edit again, you can, for example, adjust here, and I would like to see the top. So I will adjust little bit like this. I will move on these directions. This one, maybe I will move like that, and I can extend to try to box more on this direction to see the top on this area. As you can see, you can change like that. Now after to change like that, I can also have access to this element. So this element on the top. Sometimes it's not easy to select, so you can go in the layer energy panel inside your group, and inside the group, I can select, for example, this top element. I can adjust the color if I need, whether I can work like that or I can make something darker depending on the render that I want. And you can create an element in three dimensions using this one. Each time you have a group and inside the group, you will have different paths. As you can see, it can be pretty convenient. If I deactivate the snapping option, I can decide to place one element here. I can double click, maybe adjust a little bit on these directions, and I will extend a little bit here, and I will create maybe here we can adjust and this one adjust little bit here. This one on this area will work like this. Now I can also duplicate. If I go and edit, I have the possibility to duplicate the box, and as you can see, I can place another one. The problem is when you move, after with your section tool, it's going to move your ratio. So it means concretely, if, for example, you duplicate, you are like this. And if you select the group, just like that, you just move a little bit. Automatically, it will be si. So you need to double click and to adjust your box again with another one, and I can maybe adjust on these directions. Just like that, and I can create loader box, as you can see. I could also adjust the color if I need, and for this, you can select one of the pass inside. Let's change the color. I will select this blue. For this one hoops, I will click on this area, I will select this blue, and for this pass on the top, I will selt maybe this blue. As you can see, you can create boxes like this. So it definitely something convenient. Each time so you can double click, you can edit again. Don't forget that you have a group, so because you have a group, if you decide to ungroup, you can go right click here and you go ungroup, right click and Ungroup, just like that. I can also click on this one and right click and Ungroup. So if you ungroup, you only half pass. And here, for example, I can sell exist, and you can see the different element composing your composing your Swede box at the beginning for simple reason that now I have group the different elements, so it means I have multiple faces that I can dragging and moving, as you can see. That's just to show you that when you crack a Swede box, you don't have only two faces. You have multiple faces and these multiple faces, you can see something on the front on the back on the top, on the bottom depending about how you can move the handles. 12. Build shapes: We're going to see how to work with a shape builders tool. For this, we can find this. This is the shape builder tool. And the first thing that I'm going to do it is to create different shapes. I will select, for example, the rectangle tools, and I will create a first rectangle on this area. I will go in the fill and stroke panels and I will define a color. I will fill the shape with a color. Let's work, for example, with some red color or I can use this red color. Then I go into stroke and I will deactivate the stroke. I will read title with my rectangle and I will place this rectangle here. Then something that we will do it is to create another rectangle. I will create another one maybe these directions with another color. Just like that, I would select these two rectangle and dragging and moving here. I will select circle tools. I will create circles maybe around this area just like this. And I will define another color like these blue colors, and then I will create another element like, for example, another rectangle just here, and I will play this rectangle maybe around this area. So let's see how to use the Shape Builder tools. The Shape Builder tools will be interesting to link different shapes together. For this, something that we can do is you need to select the shape because if you click here, you're going to have this method, you might select some object to use the Shape Builder tools. So you need to seelct the different objects that you want to use. In this case, what I'm going to see, we crat a frame of selection to select this four object. Now when I click here, you have two modes. This is the ad mode and the delete mode. If you click on the Ad mode, if you just stay left click, you go left click, you stay left click and if you stay left click, you dragging and moving, you will be able to create only one entity with a different part. I stay left click dragging and moving just like this. Now if I decide to validate with finish, accept here. As you can see, I created only one shape. If I come back to my layer panels, I have only one pass now from the base of these multiple shapes, as you can see, can even change the color like this. So you can create only one shapes using this way. I'm going to come back with my undo panels just here. But you can see, we have four elements here and I could create in a fast way only one element. Let's continue. I will go Left click here. I will click on these tools. The second option, you can still click on Plus here, but instead to stay Left click, you just activate one Left click and another left click. In this case, you will be able to separate at the different intersection. So each time left click on the different part, for example, here on the different intersection, and now if I just validate what we can opt, we have multiple pass created. So it means we have this one. We have this one, we have this one, we have this one, and we have this one and this one. All these pass have been created from this base. So it is something also interesting to know. There is different way to use the Shape Builder tools. I'm going to show you and come back on this area. I would select H. Another option that you can do with the Shape Builder tools, it is to click did it. And when you click undid it, you can do the opposite process. For example, you can define to go left click here and you can remove this one, or you can go left click here, remove this one. If you switch four plus, you can just go here and select this one. Then I can validate and I will create my new path on the base of these four shapes. This is a principle of work or the shape will be a builder to. I will delete on the keyboard. Now let's see another concrete example. I'll take the circle tools. And I will create a circle around here, and this circle I will place in the middle. So here we are the center. You can dragging and moving little bit. When you are on the center, you can move a little bit on the top using control Oops. Again, it's not going to be extremely nice. I can go here, and I will just dragging and moving pressing control to arrive around this area. And I will go on the fill and stroke options, and I will deactivate the color. So feel, I will deactivate. And on the stroke pane, I will activate the color, and we will work with a black color and stroke style around Sui for example. So that I will do, I will extend a little bit here with shift, and I will press control. I will duplicate. I will go and edit here, duplicate or Control D, and I will dragging and moving this new element around maybe here, just like that. Now I will take the two element, and these two elements are dragging and moving to be in the center. I will select this first circle and I will press shift to select the second one. I will duplicate again with Control D or duplicate. And then when I go left click again, Oops, I will click on this one and left click again, I can have access to the rotate tools, and I will be able to rotate like this and to do something like that. And then I will select again these four circles. I will select these four circles here. I will duplicate, so edit duplicate. Then I will go left click again to have access to the rotation, and I will turn like this and I will press Control to upturn this render just like that. Now I will select all the element, and in the fill and stroke options, I will reduce the value. So here we can reduce the value of all the element at the same time and I will tap just one. So now what I can do, I would like to clean all this element to have only one entity. How I can process, I can select all the elements here. I will define directly the Shape Builder tools, and I can zoom a little bit, and I just need to go left click on the different part and I can stay left click to just create one entity. So we can do something like this. When we arrive around here, we can zoom. And as you can see, I can use my tools on all these different area like that. And now if I just valid it, I created only this entity, and thanks to that, I can clean to only have one pass. And this pass if I need, I can define maybe a color. I have also the fill and stroke options. You can one more time define the stroke value, but if I don't want any stroke, I can just remove the stroke and I will obtain this render as you can see. So this is a convenient tool that you can use these Shape Builder tools. Each time when you have different intersection between the object, you can create a new shape, so it means a new path using this way. 13. Draw with brushes: We're going to see how to draw with brushes. For this, we can use this tool. This is a calligraphic tools, and you can draw with brushes. First, I'm going to select these tools, the first thing that you can do, you can take a look to the options on the top, and here you have a different type of elements that you can use. For example, if you select no preset, for example, you select no preset, automatically, it will be to draw in a fast way and you can just draw multiple line just like this. And for this, if I go in my layer and object, I will create different paths. If you use no preset, it is like to use something like the pencil tools. You won't have anything special and you can just with this tool draw some basic curves or basic line because you don't have any preset just like that. Now here you have sinning mass, and when you work on this area, it will be useful if for example, you use, for example, the tablet mode, but if you don't use the tablet mode, you can also do this type of work, but it will be a little bit different. And as you can see, if I increase the mass, it's going to be a little bit slower. You can improve the quality of the curve using this one. I'm going to show you again. I will press dit on the keyboard. And if I just click on this tool again, for example, I will increase the mass, and you are going to see that it's going to be slow. So for example, if I start like this, as you can see, you can create a knife curve, and it's going to be very slow just like that, and I will go on these directions. And I will upturn this render. You can also go in the field and stroke value. You can adjust, for example, you have the stroke pen here, I can define some color, and this one is the stroke style. I can keep, for example, this value. Definitely, when you use these tools, if you increase the mass, you can make something really, really slow like that, but this will allow you to create nice curves as you can see, for example. Here you have this one, and you can also increase little bit. And now, if I go here, this one will be linked with the mass. So it means you can work with these two type of thing that can reduce a little bit, the mass, and you will have little bit some difference just like that. I after that, this is the type of things that we can do. You can also use rug and trembling. You are wiggle. So you can use this type of thing if you want to make something little bit randomly so I can use, for example, this one. And as you can see, now we have something little bit different and we have some wiggle as you can see. And I'm going to show you again. I will increase the value just like that, and I will just do something like this. And in a fast way, as you can see, we can just draw in a fast way, something like that. So this is the type of things that we can do. If you want to come back to something normal, I can apply a value of zero, and here we apply a value of zero. I decrease here with 20 and the mass, I will apply Oops. Yes, I apply 20 and the mass 20 as well. So now I will select all and I will press delete on the keyboard. When you click on these tools, you can also activate a preset. For example, you have the marker preset. And if you select the marker preset, automatically, you will have some predefined value. Like the mass will be at two, the angle at 90, the caps at one, and when you work like this, this one will be the marker preset. And with the marker, take a look about how we are. We can fill in the marker with a color inside just like this. So we can have a stroke and we can feel inside when we use, for example, the marker preset, just like this. So this one will be the marker preset, just here. I will click here I will come back to the fill options and I will deactivate this value. If I just come back here, you can also select something like a brush. And if you select a brush, you will have other predefined value. So when you use, for example, no preset, no preset, you won't have any specific value here, expect the first one that you use just before. So concretely, if you select, for example, the brush, you will have this value, this value, this value, and this value. So this is the value that you have when you use the brush. And when you use the brush, you have also a size corresponding to the white that we have here. So as you can see, it can be pretty convenient. This one is, for example, the brush. If you slick toner one, let's try with Noor one, what I will select. And you will have other type of predefined possibility. If I s for example, tracing, one more time the wide is at 50, if I reduce, I define something like ten. With stressing, as you can see, you won't have a lot of specific things using tracing just like that. Definitely, it is another type of tools that you can use when you want, for example, to draw. So you can click on these tools, and in a fast way, you can show any things as you can see. You can work with a value 14. Draw with pen: We are going to see how to draw with pen. And for this, we can use these tools. This is the Pen tools, and thanks to that, you can create curves, but you can also create different type of lines. So first, when I click on this tool, you have different type of mode. So most of the time, you will use create regular bezier pass, but you have also other types of mode. Here you can also define shapes. In this case, I would click on nod. First, if you want to create different line, you can just go left click and when you go Left click, you can place different point. And when you place just different point, you can create strangline just like this. If you want to validate, you need to go right click and when you go right click, you can validate like that. After to validate, if I go on the right, you can see we have a pass created. So it means we'll be able to edit the sharp point. First, if I want to feel, I will go on the fill and stroke. As you can see, when you go and feel, it's not very useful to fill because you will have something strange like this. In this case, I will deactivate feel. I will go in the stroke pain value, and in the stroke pain, I can define, for example, color, I will define the black color, and in the stroke style, I can define the sickness of the stroke. You can also close the shape. To close the shape, I will come back with these tools, and I will go left click to place multiple point, just like that, and I will just come back on this direction. And thanks to that, we can close the shape. In this case, I can keep the strop pain, but I can also fill with a color, and I will craft something like a polygon using this type of tools, just like that. And so this is the type of things that we can do. After that, you can adjust. You can double click. And when you double click, I will show you in details the not tools after, you can just select a point and you will be able to adjust the point or to convert this point in multiple way. So you can edit after that your different checkpoint. So this one is how you can create segment. It's pretty convenient. You can do a lot of things. For example, I can use my pain tools. I will be able to activate the snapping options. I will start here, and I will create, for example, something like this on the back, I will snap to the different corner here, and I will go in the struck pen options, no colors in the field options, I will define some color like maybe I will define maybe this one. Then something that I will do it is to select the pen tool again. I will click on the pen tool. First, I will deselect. I will click on the pen tools and I will snap here and I can snap to different tangle. I will go maybe on these directions. Then here, then these directions, then just here, and I will snap on this area, this area, this area, and this area, and I will define color. I can define another color, maybe I will define maybe I can define this type of color or maybe more this one like this one. And I will adjust little bit this point, I will dragging and moving here, as you can see, you can do a lot of things. I will take the pen tool again. I will start maybe I will snap here, and I will do something like this. When you use a pen tool, you need to train. See is a tool that we can use a lot. And definitely, if you train after you will be able to work with this. I could continue as well if I need. So it means I can take the pin tool. I can make something here, something here, and just make something like this. I will snap on this area and I will define some other color just like that. So this is a principle of one. I will select all and I will press delete on the keyboard. The second option when you use the pen tool, it is to create the curves. So to create curves, how you can process. You place the first print, and when you want to place a second point, you stay left click. So I arrive here, I stay left click. And when you stay left click, you can dragging and moving the mouse in a direction or in another direction to create the curves. And when you are satisfied by the curve, you can stop the left click. Then you can continue with another point. Left click, you stay left click again, and staying left click, you can dragging and moving to place handles. And when you are satisfied, you can stop the left click. I can search on this area. Left click again, I stay left click, and then I can create curves. Left click again, I stay left click. When I'm satisfied, I can stop, left click again, and left click. So you can create some curves like this. And you can also feel, for example, because you have something like a shape, you can come back with your tools. You can adjust your tools. Here, for example, this point, I can select the point, and I will switch for nod smooth to have access to two handles, as you can see. This is a principle of work. I'm going to delete this one, come back with my pen tools, and you can also create just a curves to close the shapes. For example, I will go left click here, play the first point. Left click, and I stay Left click, and I draw again move. And when I'm satisfied, I stop the left click and left click again here, I stay left click. When I'm satisfied, I can stop the left click and I place another point just like this, and you really need to train when you want to master these tools. If I just press, if you press Escape, you will remove. So you need to define right click Enter, it's going to be pretty convenient. I'm going to redo again. If I press Enter, I can validate. Here, for example, I reduce feel, null, stroke pain. And in the struck pen value, I can also define dark color. I can adjust with this print and we can adjust the pass after that is definitely not a problem, just like that. Now you have other type of modes. I'm going to click here and press delete. When you click on this tool, so most of the time you will use this one. But you have also the spiral pass tools. The spiral pass tools, it is another way to create a curve. So when you go left click, as you can see, you can create a spiral pass. So it means this is this type of curves. So the curves will be a little different, but you can create interesting curves, as you can see using this one. And if I just presenter, as you can see, I created this, and the quality of the curve is very, as you can see, very smooth. And when you move, it will be a little bit different when you move the handles, as you can see, and you can create spiral pass like this. Okay. Another way to process. I'm going to press delete on the keyboard that will come back with a pen tool. You can also create B spin. The B spin is the same. The handle will be different. So you just need to place different point and automatically you will create curves with multiple handles. One more time I can validate with enter. And if you edit this element, as you can see, if you want to move the point, you have access to different handle like this, and it is a different way to dragging and moving to create a pass first and then to drag and move with the different handles. This is another way to process. If I select the pen tool, you have also this one, create a second of straight line segment. Why it is useful because when you do something like this, you will be only in the straight mode. So it means you will be pretty sure to every time create a straight line and to never create the curves. So it means if you click here, you stay left click, as you can see, you can only create straight line. And it's not possible to create curves. So sometimes it's good because you can use the Bzier part and by mistake, you can create the curves. Let's just click here and press delete for this one. Another thing that you can do with these tools, it is paraxial line segment, and automatically, you will have perpendicular line. So it means you create line like this, automatically all the line will be perpendicular just like this. And you can also come back on these directions. So while it is useful, it is useful because you can work horizontally and vertically. So, for example, I'm going to show you, I can click on these tools, and I can start on this area. And if I go left click here, I can define I can define with control horizontal line. Control will allow you to create a constraint just like that. And now after to create this first horizontal line, I can go in any direction. It will be horizontally or vertically. So as you can see, each line now will be perfectly horizontally or vertically because I'm using this mode and I can snap here, snap here, snap here, snap here, and I will go on the stroke pen value, no stroke fill options, and I will activate color. I will define, for example, this red color, but it can be an odor one, just like this. As you can see, I can craft something like this, and everything will be perfectly horizontally and vertically as well. So it is another way to process. You can use this type of mode. But most of the time you will use the regular pasio pass. So it's okay with this tool. 15. Draw with pencil: We are going to see how to draw with pencil. And for this, we can use these tools. This is the pencil tools, and thanks to that, you can draw different type of lines. And when I click on these tools, first things to understand, you have different modes one more time. So the regular Busier pass, you can find the spiOPas. The spleen pass one more time is a flattened spiO spin. If I click on this are a, you have also some percent of pressure. So pressure is useful if you work on tablet. Here, it's not the case I'm on computer, but if you work on tablet, it can be useful. You can also change the end with a round cap, and the smoothing option will be very interesting. So first, I will decrease the smoothing options. Concretely, what you can do you can also define a color. I will define, for example, the blue color. And if I just go left click, you can just draw like this in a fast way. When you stop the left click, I can apply a filling stroke, I will deactivate the field value, and in the stroke pane, I will activate a color, and I will activate this color, it will be pretty better. If I just click on this tool, as you can see, multiple point will be created, and in the layer panels, we will have a pass created. So when you click on these tools in a fast way, the pencil tool, you can just go and you can draw anything you want, just like this. So you can draw anything using these tools. You can draw something, just do something like this. And you can create multiple lines using this type of tools. Now, the smoothing value here first the cap because at the end, as you can see, we have this one. This round, you can just change and you will have something a little bit different depending on what you choose on the cap. You can have different type of cap that you can use at the end. Let's just come back on wound. Something that I wanted to show you also, it's, smoothing value is important because as you can see, we don't have very nice curve. Don't forget that if you snap to a point, you can extend the path that you have first. So if, for example, I snap here, I can stay on and snap to this path just like this. So now what I will do, I will select all here and I will press delete. I want to show you the smooth value extremely useful. I will click on the pencil tools. And if I don't have a lot of smoothing, example, write a curve like this. And as you can see, it's not very nice curves. Now, if I increase the smoothing, like, for example, around 50, and I do this type of work, as you can see, the curve is pretty better. And if I increase more, like, for example, this value, we lose details, but the curves will be definitely pretty better. Take a look. If I select a lot tools, here we will have all the points. Here we will have only a few points and here only a few point as well. If you have too much smoothing value, for example, you increase, you increase, the maximum is 100 and you want to create something like this. We will have only two point. And as you can see, we only have two point because the smooth value is very high. So when you go here, this is why you can do the smooth tools. Sometimes you can switch and you can adjust with a value, just like that. So now I'm going to reduce a little bit. I will select my tools, Seling all the element press delete on the keyboard. When you click on these tools, you can also do the same thing with the spiral pass. So exactly like the pin tools, you can do this type of work, but with a spiral pass. You can also use a B plein pass. So it is same, but each time you have different way to adjust the point and then the flattened Spiro as well just like this. So if, for example, I select the not tool with a flattened Spiro, I can adjust with this type of handles. With this one, so it means a spero pass, you can adjust with this type of handles, and then with this one, you can adjust with this type of handles as well. And it's pretty good. If you want to draw anything, you can use these tools. I can select one more times my pencil tools. I will zoom little bit. I will reduce a little bit smoothing value around 40, I will use, for example, this type of tools. And you can also, as you can see create some just base, and I can snap to just here and I can do something like this, for example, just on this area. I will do something here. You can create in a very fast way, multiple lines as you can see. You can create on the first layer, for example, a base and maybe in this case, I can separate. Here we have some area for so eyes as you can see, just like this. There's some noise here, some mouse, and that's it. So you can create multiple elements in a fast way. If I select all, I will define the fill and stroke option in the stroke paint, I will define a color, but I can define the color only after. What does it mean if I select these tools? As you can see, we have this color. I can use a stroke paint and I will define the black color, and then I will press delete again. So what I will do, I will click here, I will increase a little bit of smoothing value. And for example, I can do something on the bag like this. And we can create multiple lines. Every time you will add a new pass on this area, so you add a new pass. If I go in my object, you can see all the pass will be created here. So after we can group, we can also link paths together, but we need to be careful when we do this type of work. But on the base, we have multiple paths, as you can see, can even move all paths in a fast way with a selection tools or with a node tools to edit the different nodes as you can see.This is how we can use this tool. 16. Edit points: We are going to see how to edit Shar Point. To do this work, we can use this tool to edit Shar Point and thanks to that, we can edit the nodes. For things to do, I will create a pass and for this, I will select the Pen tools. With the pen tools, I will create a pass. I will select this mode first and we'll create multiple segment. I will go left click to create a first print and we will create multiple point just like this, this one, this one, and this one, and I will press Enter. Then I will go in the fill and stroke panels. In the field panels, what we will do will deactivate the fill, and we will go on the stroke value and we will create a stroke. I will go in the stroke color. I will define the black color, and for the stroke style here, you have two. I think it's pretty convenient. Then I will deselect. I will create er pass. I will select the pain tools, and this time we'll create a few curves. So I will go left click here, and I will place ner point with left click and we will drag and move to create a curves. Then I will stop the left click, create er point here, stay left click, dragging and moving the andles and you can stop the left click, then left click again here, and I will create my type of pass. And after to do this type of work, I will press Enter to create this type of curves. So I can move this one here and I will move this one here. So now, when you click on the nod tools, you will have access to the different nodes. When, for example, you want to select a nod, how you can do. You just go left click and the node will appear in blue, and it means the node is selected and you can drag in and move in. If you want to select multiple node at the same time, you Press left click and you can press Shift. And when you press Shift, you can select multiple nodes at the same time. For example, I selected these four nodes at the same time, and if I just dragging and moving, the four nodes are selected as you can see, and I can move the four nodes at the same time. Left click outside if you want to deselect. If you want to create more nodes, you can insert a new node into selected segment. For example, I can click here when I'm on a segment Left click and I can double click to create a new nodes. Double click again, and I added these two nodes. It means now I can maybe do something like this, and as you can see, I can change that. You have also the possibility to delete a selected node so how you can process you select a node, and after that, you can click on Delete Selected node and the node will be removed. Automatically, this one will be converted to dL curves and this one as well. If I click here, I can delete also this node, just like that. To know if I want to come back to segment, it's possible. You can click on a node. When you click on a node, you have different type of option here. So it means you can make selected node corners, smooth, symmetric or auto smooth. In this case, I will slick not corners, just like that. I will click on this one, and I will slick nod corners, and I will come back just like that. So it is also something important to know. Now, if you have something like a curve, I will selt this pass just like this. After to select this pass, I can click on a node, and as you can see, you can also dragging and moving some nodes. But because it is a nod curves, you can see these handles and you can see this handle that you can move in a symmetric way. These handles, if I want to convert to not corners, I can click here, not corners. I will click on this one and not corners as well, just like that. But sometimes you need to click a second time to really activate this type of render. Now you have different options. If I click on this node, the first convert that you can do is not smooth. Not smooth, what is this? It is just like this. You can dragging and moving this handle and this handle. And as you can see, you have the right balance on the right and on the left. If you convert this one to nod, symmetric, if you move something on the right on the left, it will move in a symmetric way. And if you convert to auto smooth, just like this, it's a little bit different because you can move this one just like that, and automatically, you will have the autosmoos activity. Also come back to node corner. In this case, I can move on easy easy one in two different way. And if you activate again this will be perfectly convert to two strength segment, as you can see. You can also apply some change on segment. And for this, you are straighted line and add curves handles. So for example, you can select a segment here. When I click on the segment, this node is selected and this node is selected, I can add curve handles, and automatically on this node, I have a new handles, this one, a new handles, and I can convert like this. If I select again this segment, I can use this one, strengthen lines, and I can convert to straighten. You have definitely a lot of type of options that you can use. Now you can even open pass. What does it mean? It means that if, for example, I select this one, you can just on this area, you have different type of options. And for example, you can join selective node or brick pass selective node. So I can select a node and I can use brick pass. And in this case, as you can see, you can open like that, here. You can also select two nodes just like that, and you can at the opposite train the selected node. At the same time, you can join selected node with a new segment or deleted segment between two nod and print. Little bit different, you can just train the end of element just like that. So this type of things that we can do. But most of the time we will use these two types of options as you can see. So definitely, you can do a lot of things. You can even convert to object to pass, stroke to pass, but I will explain more in details after because when you go on pass, you have object to pass and stroke to pass as well. Now something that you need to understand, I will do this more in details after, but you can convert any object to a pass. If I select the rectangle tools, I will create the rectangles, fill and stroke, deactivate the stroke, on the field, and on the field value, I will use the red color and I will place the red color here. I will select the circle tools, and I will create a circle just like that, and I will define a green color. Convert to pass, you can click on the rectangle, for example, pass Object to pass, and I can click on the circle, pass object to pass. So now in the layer object, we have the pass creative. What does it mean? It means if I select these tools. I can now have access to the handles and I can now adjust the handles. You can also click on the handles, I can convert to, for example, a curves. You can also click on plus, you can add a new handle. So you can do a lot of things as you can see, to, for example, adjust at your convenience, your shapes just like. And it is same here. I have no access to the handle, so it means I can drag in the handle. You can also press Control to stay on the same igment. And I can also select two handles like this one and this one, and hoops, I converted. This one and this one we shift, and as you can see, I can move the two at the same time. And if I press control, I can stay on a vertical or horizontal axis, as you can see, just like that. But definitely, you have this possibility to edit some basic shapes, converting to pass, and then you can use also these different tools. 17. Master transformations part 1: We're going to see how to work with transformation. For this, I will select the rectangle tools and we will craft a rectangle like this. On this rectangle, when you use the selection tools, first, I will go on the right, and I have the possibility to go on feline stroke with define colors and I will go on the stroke pane and I will deactivate the stroke. So when we work with transformation, as I explained before, when you just go left click, you select your object, you can dragging and moving the object. You have the possibility with handle to scale non proportionally, just like this. And if you want to scale proportionally, you can press control. And with control, you can scale proportionally and keep the proportion depending of your transformation point, just like this. If you want to scale proportionally and from the center, you can press shift and control at the same time and you can scale proportionally from the center. This one is when you go one left click. You have the possibility also to create a second left click and in this case, you can have access to the rotation print, and you can also share your object. For example, I can create rotation axis, and if I want to add a constraint, I can press control to constraint every 15 degrees or 15, 30, 45, 60, 75, and 90 degrees. So you can press control if you want to add constraint. Also the possibility to cheer and for this, you can select these handles and you can do something like this. For example, or you can do something like this as well. Each time depending on your transformation point because the transformation print is located here. If this transformation print, you can change, and you can dragging and moving your transformation pran. If you don't activate the snapping options, it's not possible to snap your transformation pran. If I located here, for example, in accurate rotation, as you can see, we turn around this transformation print. You want to snap the transformation point to a specific area, you can click here, you can activate enable snapping and this one concern directly Object rotation center, Object rotation center, and you can activate Snap. In this case, I can, for example, place this one maybe on this corner, snap to this corner. And if I turn around, as you can see, I can turn around this transformation point as you can see. But if I want to place one more time in the center, I'm going to show you, I can also ragging and moving, and I can snap to the center of my object. While it is useful, I'm going to delete, and I will select a circle. So I will create a circle just like this. And these circles, I will place on the top just here, and I will reduce a little bit, just like that. Will create another color. For example, I will define this color. I will select to create another circle just like this. This circle, I will define maybe the yellow color and I will play this circle in the center here and this one around this area. Now, I would like to repeat in a circular way this ellipse all around. How I can process, first, I will change the transformation points where I would go left click again, and I will dragging and moving the transformation point in the center here. After to do this type of work, if I wanted to turn, I can turn around my center. So now what I need to do I will just duplicate and turn. So I will press Control D to duplicate, and then I can turn and I can press Control to constraint 90 degrees. Then I can press Control D, I can duplicate, and I can turn like this and press Control to constraint. Then I can press Control D again, and I can duplicate and I can press control to constraint 90 degrees. Now if I want to repeat this four object at the same time, I can click on this one, press shift, click on this one, press shift, click on this one, press shift, stay shift, and I can slick this four object. If I go left click again, I can have access to the rotation of the four objects at the same time even if I don't have a crew. Now what I will do, I will press Control D to duplicate. After to duplicate, I can turn around and I can press Control to constraint 45 degrees. Now if I stop, I can do something like this. So as you can see, it can be pretty convenient to you. This is how, for example, you can repeat in the circular way different element around. Now what I will do, I will create selection of just like that. And if I create a selection of, I can, for example, scale again so I can scale if I need. And I can put this one maybe here. I will go in the layer object and I will create a group with this. I will go right click, create a group or Control G, and now I created a group. And if I select this group, for example, I can select all the group and I can press Control D to duplicate my groups, and then I can click here and scale. If I want to keep the proportion, it is important to press control, and if I press Control, I can keep the proportion. Now I will press Control D to duplicate the group again, and I will extend the value. I will press Control T again. And we will scale little bit, maybe just like this, Control D again, and I will scale like that. I will press Control D again. I can go here, so I can make this time multiple times. I'll just go left click. Oops. If I select my group, just like this. I will go left click again, and I can crat some rotation again, just like that. I will click on this one, left click again, and I can create some rotation like this. I will click on this one, left click again, and I will do some rotation. As you can see, it can be pretty convenient. Here, for example, I have multiple groups. So every time when you have something like this, one left click, you select your object and you can, for example, scale with control and you can press shift to scale from the center and keep the proportion. And if you just go another or left click, you can also crat some rotation, but you can also share your shape, as you can see, I can do, for example, something like this if I need. And as you can see, it can be pretty convenient. I can use also on these directions and on this direction if I need. Just like this. This is something that you can use. 18. Master transformations part 2: We're going to continue with the transformation. For this, I will select the rectangle tools, and we will create a rectangle around here, and I will craft a small rectangle on this area. And this rectangle, I would use, for example, the blue color. Then I will duplicate Control D or edit and for example, duplicate. And I will play this one here. I will write a rotation. I will press control. So as I explained before, I can press control. I want to rotate here, wrote this transformation print and left click again to come back and I will scale a little bit more, and I will play this one around just here. So after do this type of work, I will sex these two objects with a frame of selection, and I will go on the pass. I will sex boolean operations union. Now I have only one entity, this is a pass as you can see. Now what I wanted to show you, I wanted to show you here you have different type of transformation. For example, when you have object here, you have the possibility to rotate this object, 90 degrees counter clockwise. You can also use this 190 degrees clockwise, just like this. After you can also create some symmetries. For example, I will select this element, and I will press Control D to duplicate, we will stay on the same in front just like this. And on this area, I have flip selected object horizontally. So flip selected object horizontally. And that's it. This is the type of things that we can do. I will select this element, and I will just join here, and I will take the two element and I will go on the path here to create a union. So now what we will do we duplicate as well. I will click here, I will press Control D, and I will stay on the same axis, pressing Control to stay on the same axis. And I would like to flip as well. So we have seen that we can use flip selected object horizontally, but we can do also as well vertically. So we define vertically, and I will snap on this area just around here. Then I will select all this element, and I will go on the pass here, and I will create union, just like that. As you can see, I created, for example, this element using different flip options, just like that. This is the type of things that we can do. After that, one more time, as I explained before, one left click, you can create some rotation just like this. And if you do left click again, you can scale. Left click again, you can also cheer using these different endles just like this. So what we will do now, I will crat something like a tree. I will crat a rectangle just like that. I will crat a small rectangle around here, and I will define some brand color, like for example, this one. Then I will press Control D, and I will duplicate, and I will make something a little bit darker. I will reduce a little bit here on this a little bit, and I will select and create a group. I will go right group or Control G. Now I will select the ellipse tools and I will create an ellipse around this area. And these ellipse, what we will do we will convert to pass pass object to pass, and now if I'm using these tools, I can have access to this handle to this point, I can dragging and moving pressing control just like this. Now I will define some green color like maybe this one. We duplicate. For this, I will press Control D, and I can duplicate on the same area. I would make something a little bit darker like this color. And if I go darker, little bit this one, brighter and double click. As you can see, I can move little bit these handles. We can zoom here and we can move little bit these handles around this area to make something like this. Oops. I think something was moving. Yes, I need to select only these handles. And if I select only this handle, I can move a little bit maybe like this. We crate to group as well. So I will select this element, and I will go right click, rat to group, and then I can align my group with the er one, just like this. So we have two group and we can align this group around just like this. And I will select all the element and right click again, create an or group. So now I created this type of element. So one more time, I can, for example, place here and we can increase little bit of size, and I will press, for example, we create rectangles little bit on the back, maybe a rectangle here with these colors, and I will duplicate, edit, press duplicate, and I will make something a little bit darker and I will just move a little bit here, just like that. Maybe we can invert the color. This one I can click here and this one I can make something maybe like this. This one maybe like this. This one, it can be this color, oops, this color, and this one, this one. So I will click on this element, and I will put here on selection to top, so we can change the position for ground backgrounds. After to do this type of work, I will, for example, press so this one can be close to the front and I will scale little bit, make something bigger. I will deactivate the snapping options, just like that. And I will press Control D to duplicate and I will reduce little bit this size and put this here. Then I will press Control D, duplicate and something that I can do is, for example, to use this and I can flip the selected object, maybe like that. Then we will press Control D, and I will define another one, just here, and then I will press Control D, and I will define another one. Here I can scale little bit and I can do something like this and repeat. I can press Control D with this one, place another one, maybe just like this. Here and I will just turn using the flip horizontal tools, and I will press Control D, and I will dragging and moving here, and I will scale a little bit on this area, as you can see, and see the type of things that we can do. So the important element was to show you how we can work with this tool. So it means you can use this type of rotation and you can flip also the selected object. 19. Duplicate objects: We are going to see how to duplicate object. For this, I will select the rectangle tools and with the rectangle tools, I will crack the rectangles here. After to do this type of work, I will define a color, like, for example, the red colors. I will place my rectangle around this area. To duplicate an object, you have different options. The first option can be the shortcut Control D. So if you press Control D, you can duplicate the object exactly on the same location, and then I can, for example, dragging and moving the object just like this. Another possibility to duplicate an object is to go right click. And when you go right click, you can duplicate as well. And here I can duplicate, just like this. After to do this type of work, you can also go and edit on edit, you can also duplicate the object with duplicate again, selected object, and then I can duplicate as well. This is a type of thing that you can do. You can also select multiple objects at the same time. For example, I have these four objects selected and I can duplicate as well. I can go right click in this case, and I will click on duplicate and I will duplicate these four rectangles. As you can see, this is how we can duplicate objects, different type of options. I'm going to delete this one. I'll create rectangles and I would like to activate the snapping options on the right, and we create rectangles around this area. Then we define a color like these green colors and we can maybe define these green colors just like this. Then I will duplicate this rectangle. For this, I will use Control D, so I duplicate. I change a little bit of colors, and I'm going to move a little bit this element around this area, just like that. Oops. I think I need to deactivate the snapping options. It will be pretty better. So after to do this type of work, I will create something basic like a basic tree, so I will just create rectangles just like this, and we activate on this rectangle brown colors, and then we select the circle tools. And with the circle tools, we just create ellipse around this area, and I will switch with maybe a green colors, this one or maybe this one, and I will place this one around here. I will activate the snapping options to be able to center my element just on this area. And now I will create a group. So to create a group, I will select these two elements. And I will press Control G or I can go also on object, and you can define groups or rightly groups as well. And now I created a group just like this. And as you can see, I can select my groups, I can move just like that, and I will place maybe my element around here, just like this. Maybe I can scale a little bit more. I will deactivate the snapping options, and I will scale a little bit more. So now what I will do, I would like to duplicate. Let's use a different option. You can also go on the layer panels. When you go right, click on the layer panels, you can duplicate as well. For example, I duplicate it here and I can move this one, maybe I will make something a little bit smaller if I'm on the back just like this. I will press this time, I will go on edit and I will click on duplicate and I will maybe go here. Let's make something a little bit smaller on this area. Then I will go right click, for example, and I will click on Duplicate, and I will raging and moving just here. Maybe I can just increase a little bit of size and put something a little bit on the front just like this. This time, I will press Control D, and with Control D, I will place another one, maybe on the back just like this. As you can see, it can be pretty convenient. You can just have the multiple options. You can choose what you prefer, generally control this pretty convenient, but you can just go right click, for example, and you can duplicate as well. L just continue. I will click on this one, and I will go right click here, and I will duplicate this element, then I will scan a little bit and I will play this element just here. And if I wanted to repeat, I can repeat the process as well. Maybe I can scale something a little bit bigger. I can place this one here, this one here, and this one little bit on the right, and I will press Control D again, and I will scale a little bit this one and we will reduce and place little bit on the back. So maybe this one around here, this one around here, and this one, let's make something little bit more bigger around this area. So this is how we can process. Even on this one, I can, for example, go here and a p press Control D. I will define another color like maybe this one and I will dragging and moving a little bit here. Then I will duplicate again, and I will go right click this time, I will duplicate, and I will define another colors, and I will just move a little bit here. I just change the position. So what does it mean? I will select all the trees here. And after to sec all the trees we shift, I will just put this on the front, and I will obtain this render, as you can see. Maybe this one we can dragging and moving a little bit here. 20. Create offsets: We're going to see how to crack, offset. And for this something that I'm going to do it is to create a rectangles and we'll create a rectangle here first. So let's see the basics of the offset first. And when you have this rectangle, for example, you can go on pass here and if you select inset, you can just create inset. In this case, it is just like to reduce. But if you go on pass, you can also define set and it is like to increase a little bit. You can also create a dynamic offset. So it means you have handles and you can create a dynamic onset like this. And you have the last possibility is to use a link of set, and in this case, little bit the same but in a little different way, just like that. To know why it can be useful because finally it just like to increase or anythings like this. So I'm going to show you you can create a rectangle like this, and you can duplicate this rectangle so you can press Control D. And after to press Control D, you can put the rectangle on the back, lower selection to bottom. And now you can change, for example, the color and go on pass and you can select, for example, Wooset. And you can continue pass Wood set, pass Wood set, pass Wood set and do something like this. Or you can select the blue rectangle one more time. You can go on edit, duplicate, you define another color like the yellow color, and you go pass inset, pass inset, pass, inset, and you can do something like this. So now why it is useful also to use the dynamic offset or the link offset, I'm going to show you I will remove this one and I will remove this one to only keep the blue rectangle. Because when you click on Pass, you have the dynamic offset. And thanks to that, you can, for example, scale on this area. But if you use a dynamic offset, I'm going to use my section tool, put something on the back, put this one. As you can see, you don't duplicate the object while at the same time, if I just come back before my dynamic upset and you select, yes, before the dynamic offset, you can see the icon was changing. So now if I see this rectangle, I can go on pass and you can use Link offset. And if you click on link offset, automatically, you keep your original rectangle and you create a new pass. And now, for example, I can extend, I can define colors, but it is interesting because automatically, the shape is on the backgrounds and we have a new pass created, and I could continue with, for example, pass Link offset again, and I change the colors, and as you can see, we can do something like this in a very fast way. So this is why the link can be pretty convenient. So now let's see a second example. I will delete all the elements on my layers, and after that, I will sell the paint tools, and we will use this mode. P 2 seconds of parallel line segment, we will go left click here. Left click, left click and left click here. Then I will press Enter just like that, and I will go on fill and stroke. We will go on fill option, nod, stroke, paint, activate colors, and I redefine, for example, this orange color. I will define also the stock style, and I can increase. I will put a value like, for example, we will put maybe 26. You know what I will do, I will use a dynamic upset. So one more time, you can for example duplicate. So I can come back here and I can select the pass, I can press for example, Control D, then I change the color, and I oops not the color, the color on the stroke. So I can change the color on the stroke feeling stroke, stroke pain and I define another color and I need to put on the back. And now I can use, for example, pass, and I can use Woodset, something like this. But the problem is, as you can see, if you do something like that, it's not going to be convenient, as you can see. Or if you use pass, you select, for example, if you select element this one, you select pass, and you select inset, you will obtain something like this, so it's not convenient. So what you will use, here, I'm going to remove this one. Something that you can do it to use pass dynamic of set. And if you use the dynamic offset, we'll obtain this type of render. And as you can see, we can just go on this area and we can obtain this render. So it's not extremely convenient in this type of case. If I just come back at this moment, and I have, for example, this pass. If you use link offset, as you can see, you will do something like this. And when you have the pass, just like that, you will use fill and stroke. And as you can see, you can reduce the stroke just like that. But the problem is when we arrive on this area, the problem is we have something close just like that, just here. So this is a problem that we can have. Now, if for example, I have this element and I convert to pass, it's going to be different. So we'll go and pass and I will select stroke to pass. So now after to select stroke to pass, it's different. And if I'm using these tools like pass and I define dynamic upset, now it's going to work. And as you can see, I can extend, I can put this one, then go on the back and I will do something like this. But I forgot to duplicate. So I will just come back here. At this moment, I will click here. I will press Control D, I will duplicate, I will change the color, pass Dynamic offset, extend, click here and go on the back. And I have, for example, this color just like that. So as you can see, it's convenient in this case. So this is why the last possibility I'm going to undo, undo until to have just my yellow shapes like this. This one I can remove. So I have this element. So this is why you can use pass link offset. Because if you use Link offset, automatically, you have a new pass crat. You can select, for example, a color and you can just extend a little bit. And I could continue pass ink offset, I will define an dark color. Let's put, for example, I will put this one and I will extend it a bit, and I will continue pass Link offset. I will define another dark color like maybe this one and I will continue like this. And in this case, as you can see, can be pretty convenient. Oops. You need to be careful after if you move to move all the elements at the same time. This is how to work with the offset. 21. Change objects: We're going to see how to work with the tweak tool. So for this, something that we're going to do it is to create rectangles, and will create rectangles around this area. And I will put my rectangles just like this. I will scale little bit and I will go around here. Then what I will do, I will select the pen tools. And with the pen tools, I will activate the snapping options, and I will start on this corner point. I will create another point here, I will move a little bit, and then I will zoom a little bit and we'll create different point like this. I will create different curves with multiple point around here, and I will create different type of curves. I will go around these directions, and then we can snap here. So on this area, I will define a green color like this green color. So what you can do with these tools, concretely, you can select the twit tool it is located here. It is a tool not extremely easy to use. It's a little bit specific. Concretely, you have different type of options. For example, when you use move object in any direction, you can define a white, so it means you can define the white of your closer, you can increase or decrease, just like this, depending on the white that you use. Here you can define a force and fdlity value. But just go left click here. As you can see, it's not working for a simple reason I need to facilitate the object, and now it's going to work. So I'm going to click here and I can just drag and move. If, for example, I increase a little bit the size just like this, as you can see, I can move on the directions, and I can also increase the force to move more easily on any directions, just like that. Here it is this direction. But if I click on this area, I can go in another direction like for example, this one, and you can move your cursor to move, for example, your object just like this. You have also move object in random direction and sometimes you can move like this. The way it can be useful because you can, for example, have something like this, you can duplicate multiple times and I can move here, press Control D, press Control D again, and I can have multiple objects. I will press Control D again. You have another one, Control D again, and I will press Control D again and that's it. So if I come back to the twit tools, as you can see, you will be able if you select all these objects first, you select all these objects, all these objects are selected. If now you select the twit tools, as you can see, you can move the object in a random way. So for example, I can moving the object in a random way and change, for example, the position just like this. I have also the possibility to dragging and moving just in a fast way, different type of object. And sometimes it can be convenient. If you want to make something randomly, you can use this type of tools. You have also shrink object, and here you can decrease. So it is interesting if you want to make something randomly, for example, and you can use also rotate object, so you can turn a little bit some object. Just like this, you can just go left click. So as you can see, it can be interesting. And when you click here, you can rotate in the other way. You can also one more time, it address the why and address the force as well. So this is the type of thing that you can do. There are also that type of tool, push pass, push part of pass in any direction. So here you can push in any direction using your cursors, and as you can see, you can, for example, extend on any direction. You can also shrink in set here, and as you can see, you can shrink some element just like that. E as I explained, it is to have multiple elements that you can adjust in a random way. And for this, we have different type of options and you can adjust in random way your different element using these different tools. You can also use root and part. Even here, for example, I Zooms not going to impact. I'm going to show you after. You can even use paints with a selective color. So concretely, if you use one of color here, you will be able to convert little bit your original color to the color that you can choose. Have also the possibility to use Jitter. So here you will jitter an element, just like that, as you can see. And the last possibility will be to add blur. And in a random way, you can, for example, add blue on multiple element just like that. So something that you need to understand is this. You can have multiple object, and you can use this tool if you want to make something randomly. And for this, you have all these different types of options to make something randomly. But even if you don't work with multiple objects, so for example, I can select all the subject and I define this one, I have also some possibility. If I'm using one more time these tools, I will click on these tools, just like this, I will zoom little bit. And it's the same if I use move object in any direction, as you can see, I can move all the object just like that. I can, for example, move in another direction. Even if in this case, it's not very interesting, but just to show you the principle of if I select something like, for example, push part of path of any direction. I'm moving a little bit here, I define a way. And as you can see, I can push, for example, in these directions and also increase the size, and I can push, for example, this area on this direction, not all the object only this area. And I can also increase my size, just like that. And as you can see, you can push on this direction. You can add the opposite string, so inset, and I can also craft inset, just like that, which is also another type of possibility. So as you can see, I can adjust also using these tools. You can also add some blue. So if you click here, you can add directly a lot of blue on your element. You can also use something like Rotten, and in this case, it's going to be interesting because if I'm zoom a little bit here because I have different so point, if I'm using these tools, going to zoom little bit out, and I can try to use Rutten. And oops, now it's not going to work properly. So I will click on this area and I will go left click here and you can Roten using these tools, as you can see. You can also attract part of pass to what cursor, and you can do something also just like this, as you can see when you use these tools. But in first case, it was more interesting to use. So you need to understand that. If you want to create something randomly, these tools will be perfect. So tool steak object by sculpting or painting, you select the options that you want, this one, so this one is a blue. So you sex the options that you want. And after that, if for example, you select multiple object, you can also edit multiple object to create something randomly thanks to these tools. The thing that I'm going to do is to remove this element. And it's okay with the Twig tory. 22. Spray objects: We're going to see how to use the spray tools. P is something that I'm going to do. First, I will go on this area and we'll select these tools. This is the polygon tools, and I will create polygons here. First, I will start my polygon just like that. After to start my polygons, I will go on the fill and stroke options and we deactivate the stroke, and I will activate fill options and I will define the red color. Then I will reduce little bit this element. B, we can see the spray tool. To use the spray tool, how you can process. You need to select the objects that you want to repeat in a fast way. So you select, for example, this object. Then you click on the spray tools, and you can just repeat this object, create multiple copies, spray clone of the initial election or spray copy of the initial selection. You are going to understand the difference. So for example, if I'm using this one, I can just define the wide, just like this, define the amount. If for example, you go Left click. Each time when you apply Left click, you can repeat. Why we have different size because we have a scale value here. This is because we have a scale value, but if we have zero, it's going to be different. For example, I can just remove this one, remove this one, remove this one, and remove this one. And if I'm using the spray tool, I can just go left click hoops. I need to apply a scale value, I think, one and hoops, I will click on this one, and I will use the spray tools. And if I just go left click, I can repeat in this way. You can also apply, yes, value of zero, and you can just repeat in this way. If you stay live click, you can repeat also in a very fast way here. And you can use offset value, so it means you can apply a minimum of offset using this one with offset value. For example, I at 100 and you can just go with a minimum offset value as you can see. Let's just come back with maybe 100. Now because I'm using this spray clone of the initial election, if the first one I adjust, all the one will be adjusted. If I reduce, all the one will be adjusted because we have the clone. Now if I don't have a clone, for example, I remove this one, I remove this one as well. I create another polygon like this. If we don't have a clone, so it means I'm using the spray tools, and I use this one, spray copy of the initial selections. So I can just spray this multiple time with Left click. Here it's different. We don't have a clone. So because we don't have a clone, if I adjust the first one like this blue color, I increase or reduce, no things will change because we don't have a clone. So this is a difference between these two modes. So this is the principle of work of this one. Let's create an element. I will one more time, take this example and we'll create one more time this example with the rectangles. Let's crap to basic 31 more time. I will click here, I will select the circle tools, and I will create a circle like this. We define some green colors, and I will put my element just like that. And I will extend little bit here. At the same time, let's crate a small effect. I will duplicate this one. First, I will reduce a little bit. I will press Control D. I will move on these directions and reduce little bit this element, just like that with something little bit darker for the bright colors. Let's put this one on the front. I will select these two rectangle, go right click and I will create a group. Then I will center this one. I will first extend little bit, and I will use pass Object to pass. Then I will duplicate with Control D, and after to duplicate with Control D, I will define this color and double click to adjust little bit the handles, just like that. Maybe we can change the green color for maybe this one. So after that, I will select these two ellipses, and I will go right click again, create the groups, and I will center the groups just on this area. Will center the groups around here. So now I will deactivate the snapping options. I will select all the element, go right click and create a complete groups. So here we have a complete group like this. And I would like to, for example, repeat this group. How I can process, I can use the spray tools. I can use the tools, spray tools. And if I define here, I can just go left click and repeat in a fast way. But something that I can do, it's also to apply, for example, a scale value. So if I apply a scale value of 40, for example, it is like to have a difference of 40%. Each time when I put a left click, I can have 40% of different size. As you can see, it can be pretty convenient. If I increase, I can have more difference, it can be a different until 60% of the original. So as you can see, it can be pretty convenient to use. Just like this. And you have also more options. Maybe this option here, you can also define the scatter value. If it is your stay Live click, it can be convenient to use. But if you just apply small live click, it's a little bit different. And I can repeat my element just like that. You can also have a random rotation with a number of percent, and you will realize that you can also turn a little bit as well. So here, I can, for example, turn a little bit also with a value of 10% randomly, just like that. This is the type of things that you can do using the rotation. So if you want to repeat elements in a fast way, this is how you can use these tools. 23. Create groups: We are going to see how to create groups. We select the rectangle tools and we will create rectangles around this area. Then this rectangle, I will zoom little bit play the rectangle here with scale and after that, I will adjust my rectangle with double click and I will create rounded corners. So we'll play this one and we will duplicate with Control D to duplicate, and I will place on the right, and I will scale with control to keep the proportion and reduce little bit. Then Control D again, and I will move here. I will scale with control as well. And I will select these two rectangle with shift, and I will press Control D to duplicate, place these two rectangles here, and then I will use object flip horizontal, just like that. Now we'll move a little bit closer these different rectangles to create maybe something like this. And something that we will do it is to it is to first work with the same alignment. So first I will select all the element. I will open in these panels will go in the object panels to open the align and distribute panels, and I reduce alignment, and I will activate here this alignment center on horizontal axis relative to page, and I will define this space distribute horizontally, just like that. One of the problem is, if we select hoops, if we select all the element, I think this distribution is not pretty good, I will come back to the object aligned and distribute because here we have relative to page. We're going to put last selected. And if I'm using this one, as you can see, you can define a space, and yes, I will use this one. It will be pretty better. So what is the interest of the group? You have different interests. One of the first interests can be to organize in your layer panels. One of the second interest is to be able to transform all groups at the same time. Another interest is to use alignment and the distribution. To create a group, you select all the entities that you want, and then you can go right click. You can define group. You can also go on the object panels, group, or you can press Control G. If you create a group, now you can find a group on this area. And if you want to rename, you can rename, for example, I can tape group number one, just like this. So one of the first interests when you have a group, you can just click on the group. So here you can select a group. And you can dragging and moving all the group, you can transform all the group with the different tools that we have as I explained. So the first thing that you can do. You can click, select your group, and you can use the transform on all the group. You can also address the color on all the elements of the group as you can see. For example, I can put this blue color. To edit an element inside the group, you can just double click. And when you double click, you enter inside the group and you can select only one element. For example, I can only edit this element. And if I want to increase, I can increase, double click, and I can adjust only this element. I will use my Addian tools here to be able to come back to a center just like that. I just here. This is another thing that we can do. You can edit element inside the group. And for this, you can go inside. When you go inside here, when you go right click, you have group exit group. So if I go on Edit group, I come back with a selection of all the group. And if you go right click, you can find also inter groups. And when you go on inter groups, if you go WifClick, you can select an element inside the group, just like this. This is one of the first things that you can do with the group. Now why it is useful because I can center all my group using the panels. If I go on object, ailing and distribute, if I want to center all the group, I just use ling and distribute. And for example, I can also put my panels maybe here temporarily, just like this. And I can use on this area page. Click on the group hoops, I'm inside the group, right click, exit the group, and I can use center and center on my page. Now I will see the circle tools, I will create a circle with control around here. And this circle I will place in the Midl I can use Midl and Midl also, and I will use the fill and stroke panels. Feel stroke pain colors, and I will recuperate this blue color just like this, and I will go on the stroke style, and with the stroktyle value, I will increase the sickness. For example, I will tap something like 20. Maybe it's not enough. I will increase a little bit with a value of, yes, 30. Oops. 30, just like this. You know, I can center this element as well. Click here center center, and I will explain more in detail this. I will create a group if I come back to my layer panel with the circles and the group number one. I will select this circle and the group number one, and I will create another group, right click group or control G, and I created another group. And we have the second group inside. We have the first group here and the second group here. You can put a group inside another one, and I can double click and I can tap group number two, just like that. One more time, if I click on this group, I can move all the group here. I was inside it's pretty good. Let's just go right click, exit the group. If I just go one left click, I can select all the group here, just like that. Scale, and one more time, it is useful for the alignment panels also because I want to align all the elements here, I have a group, I can put relative to page, center vertical, center, horizontal, just like that. If I go right click, I can enter inside the group, I can also double click, and now I can have this and this, this one and this one. And this one, if I go right click, I can enter inside this group as well, and now I can edit this one if I need, as you can see. How you can ungroup to ungroup, I'm going to select the group number two, just like this. And after seeing the group number two, I can click on ungroup just like that and I can ungroup like this. If I select now the group number one, you can also use object and you can find group or shift control G, and you can ungroup. And now I created all my element just like this. So now it's different. I cannot use the alenval in the same way for a simple reason that I ungroup. This is how we can work with the groups. Yes. 24. Fill paths: We're going to see how to feel pass. And for this first, I will create a pass, so I will click on these tools. I will select the pain tools, and I will create a first pass just like this. And just slide this. Then I will press Enter. This path, I will go on the fill and stroke panels, and on the fill panels will deactivate the fill. I will go on the stroke paint, will activate the color, and after that, I will define the black color just like this. I will go on the stroke side, I will decrease the stroke side too much. I will just put maybe six. Then I will deselect, and I will create another pass. I will click on this area here, select the pen tools, and I will do something like this. Then I will press Enter. You have the possibility to fill two pass if it's open like this, for this, you can select one pass, the second one. And when you go on the pass here, you can define feel between pass. Automatically, you can feel between two pass just like this. Now if I take a look here on this area, you have the original pass this one, you have the second pass, this one, and you have a new pass created. Let's take a look. For example, if I'm moving here, this is a pass created, and automatically, they are linked to the two element. This is why we have sweet pass now. And if I click on these tools, you can see that we are filled between this pass and this pass with a color. So why it is useful because sometimes it's not you can make something open like this and you can feel inside. So you can make something open and you can feel inside two pass even if the pass are not closed. And you can just change the color like this. So now let's see a second example. I will select all the elements, I will press digit. I will use the pen tools, and I will just create different. I will, for example, start with creating some line around maybe here, and I will press escape hoops around here. I will press Enter, just like that. And I will select this line. I will go in the options. I will increase little bit the size of this line like around 12. I will deselect, and I will click on these tools. And with the pen tools, I will create another line, maybe just like this and I will press Enter, and I will create another one, maybe like this, and I will press enter. Then we will go around this area and I will do something like this. As you can see, I don't close anything. I don't close anything. I will press Enter and I will go on the field panels here I will deactivate the color and just keep the stock. If, for example, I click, I have this slide. I can click on this slide and I can click on this one with shift. And after to click on these two lines, I can fill between these two lines. And for this, I can go on pass here. I can use feel between pass. As you can see even if these two lines are not closed, we can fill inside just like this. And if I just come back to the field value options, I can define some colors just here. For example, I can define maybe some blue colors. If, for example, I select this line and I select maybe this one and this one, here are selected sui lines. If I go on pass and I'm using fill between pass, as you can see, we obtain this render and if now I going into fill options and I define a color, as you can see, it's not going to work properly. It's not going to work properly because I'm using too many things. Or I will redo again. I will take this pass and maybe this pass, these two ones, and I will go on pass and I will select fill between pass. And as you can see, a little bit different in this type of case. Again, this type of case is not working properly for this. I'm going to click on Undo and undo just like this. We have this one, this one, this one, this one, and this one. Now, if for example, I select this and I press shift and I select this. This slide and these multiple segment lines. I will go on pass here, fiel between pass, as you can see, I can feel like this. Now if I go in colors, I will define colors, and I can feel also using this one. Here. As you can see, this is a type of thing. Automatically, if I come back to the panels, I have this element and if I move this element, the pass around will move as well. It is also something important to know. The color that we use, the new path will be linked to the other pass. This pass is linked with this one, for example, and also with this one. We have three pass linked together. The new one and the two pass that we use to obtain this color. This is how we can work to fill pass. 25. Master boolean operations part 1: We're going to see how to work with a boolean operation. For this, I will create two objects first. I'll select the rectangle tools and we can create rectangles around this area. And this rectangle when I go on the fill and struck panels. I will deactivate the stroke and will use the field options, and I will define some colors. I will define some red colors like this one. I will place my rectangle around here. Then I will select the circle tools and I will create a circle, I will press Control to keep the proportion, and I will activate, for example, these blue colors, and I will place the circles here. Maybe I can selt the rectangle and increase a little bit the size of these rectangles on this area and put these circles, just like this, using the snapping options on the top right corner. So the first boolean operations to craft, first you can take a look on pass and pass, you can see the different boolean operations union difference intersection, exclusion division, cut pass, but also combine break apart, split pass, fracture, and flatten. The first one are what we use the most. First, you need to select at least two object or more. For example, I can select the rectangles and the blue circles. If I take a look in the layer panels, I have to object. The first one is union. Concretely, you will create a union with the two object and create only one element. When I click on Union, I have now just one pass creative, and as you can see, we just have one entity creative. And if I want to, for example, adjust the color, I can. If I want to edit the point with no tools, I can also edit the point. As you can see, we only have one entity now. This is the first type of boolean operations. Now let's undo and come back to this moment. The second type of boolean operation, I will select all the boolean operations here. And the second type of boolean operation is difference. So concretely, you will substrate the element on the foreground to the element on the backgrounds, top to bottom. So I will remove the circle to create one entity. I will click here, and as you can see, we can remove the circle to have only one pass here. And one more time if I want to address the color, I can address the color as you can see. I just come back. I will say the two objects, the order boolean operations is intersection. So we'll have the area at the intersection of the two objects. So it means we will have this lf circle here at the intersection of the two object. Intersection and I will obtain this render. Just come back. The four boolean operation I would select the two object, and the other boolean operations will be exclusion. It is just the opposite process. So concretely what you can do with exclusions, you can exclude the area at the intersection of the two. So for example, we have these half circles. These half circles will be removed. I click on exclusion just like this. And sometimes it can be pretty convenient. Going to continue here, I will select the two objects. The other boolean operations is division. Cut the bottom pass into pieces. So if for example, I click here, we can cut, and we'll have the two element at the intersection. Concretely, we have this one and this one, and now I can move this one. Concretely, I can remove it's like to remove here. So it means to create a subtraction, but we can keep this element and we can keep this element as a second object. So we can cut, but we can keep the two object of cut. Let's just come back at this moment with the undo panels. And the last type of simple boolean operations that you can use, it is the cut pass. And when you use the cut pass, you have the feeling that nothing happened. I just because we didn't have a stroke. So in this case, you need to create a stroke. I'm going to show you. You see these rectangles, you go on the right and you deactivate the color, and you go in the stroke paint and you activate a stroke. Then you can define a stroke style. I think I can decrease, I will put a value maybe of eight. I would take the circle and I will do the same thing, click on the circle, feel non, stroke paint colors, and the same the stroke style will define eight as well. So now it's different. I will select the two object. After to select the two object, I will go in the pass and I will select cut pass. Now you are going to see that's different because we have cut the pass here and now you can find this area. At the intersection of the circle, we have cut, we have cut the pass, and this is why we obtain this line. Here we have opened at the level of the pass just like this. This is the other type of boolean operations. So after that, it will be useful for a lot of things. For example, let's make something simple. You create first circles. You go on stroke, paint, non feel colors. And I will use, for example, these colors. And then I will create another circle just like this, and I will define another color like this one, and I will put the circle around here. Maybe I can scale a little bit, place the circle here, and I will subtract the red circle from the yellow circles. I will click on the two circle just like this, and I will go on pass and I will select difference. And thanks to that, I can create this new shape with the base of these two ones. Let's just click on this one and press delete. You can also do this with more shapes. For example, I create a circle just like this. We have the snapping option activated, and this circle I will place around here. Then I will press Control D, and I will duplicate the circle with another colors, and we will select these two circles and I can drag in and move around this area just like that. Maybe I can move it this one here. Then I will crack another one or I will just duplicate this one, I will press Control D, and I will duplicate. I will put another color and I will put around, maybe this area, just like that. Maybe I can try to adjust, here I can find some medals. Okay. So now at the intersection of the sie shape, so concretely, I can see the first one, the second one, and the third one will shift. And we can have raya at the intersection of this object. And we can define, for example, the intersection of the suis circle, create a new object, a new pass if you prefer. And for this, I can click on pass here and you can select, for example, intersection. And you can do this also with more objects than two. So here we have three, but it can be with four or more. And if I click on intersection, as you can see, I can optan this render. And I created this window on the base of Sui circle, for example. Any one more time, you can also double click. If you want to adjust, you can click on this area and you can adjust. Oops, I can only select these handles, and I can move the handle. I can select this one and I can move this one. So I can after adjust. T the first type of Bano person and after we have the der one because you have more type of Bolanoperon after that. 26. Master boolean operations part 2: We are going to continue with the boolean operation. We have seen a different type of boolean operations and we are going to continue with more operation. For this, I will crat tangles one more time, we craterate tangles around here. I will select one more time the red colors, and I will play the red colors on this area. Then I will select one more time the circles, and I will create circles around here just like this. Something that we are going to do it is one more time to select the two object. And after that, I will go on pass and we can create combine. So you have a difference between union and combine. At the beginning, you have the feeling if you click here that is same, but it's a little bit different if you have a stroke. So when you combine and you don't have a stroke here, you have the feeling that this is the same. But in reality, it's not the same. If I say this rectangle, I go here, I deactivate the color. I'm using stroke paint, activate the stroke paint, stroke style, we have a value of eight. I think it's pretty good. And I will select the circle, feel, I will deactivate the colors. I will activate stroke paint. Like this, and then I will use stroke style with a value of eight millimeter as well. So if you have a stroke is different because if you have, for example, a stroke like this and you go pass Union, as you can see, you can obtain this render. But if I just come back here and I sell it to two entity, and I go on pass and I define combine. As you can see, it's different. You only have one element, crati, but you can still find this edge here with the intersection. So we have only one element, but it's different because we keep the stroke of the edge, and this is why it is different. Now if I just come back around this area with two panels until two hoops until to be here. So one more time, we have this rectangle and this circle. I will select the two shapes. I will go on the pass options and we select break apart. Break selected pass into subpass. When you click here, you have to pass, and you can find just this area and you can move this one and you can move this one as well, just like this. This one is break apart. You can B in sub pass, you won't have big difference when you use the break apart. It will convert to pass if for example, I come back here and I see, for example, the rectangles. And this rectangle, I will come back with colors, stroke paint, no. And here, this circle I will come back with filling stroke stroke paint, none, feel colors, and I will define it just change with orange. Now if you select the two elements, you select break apart like this, as you can see, you will have only two element, and if you just select this one, you will just keep this one in this area. So in this case, I want to have big difference. Split pass is a little bit specific. I'm not going to show you the split pass because the split pass something really specific, and this one we are not going to see. Other type of boolean operations, you can find some element like, for example, fracture or you can find something like flatten. I'm going to select this two element just like that, and I will create rectangles, and I will create rectangles around here. These rectangles, I will activate to green color, this one. I will go on pass Object to pass and thanks to that, I can use the node tools and I can edit the nodes. I will double click here and move a little bit and double click here and move little bit. I'll say this one I will convert to cures and this one converts to not symmetric. And I will adjust little bit here and adjust little bit here. You know what I will do, I take the circle tool. I create a circle just like that. And this circle I will change the color, I will define maybe this one. This element I will change for this and this one I will change for this. And then I will play this circle here, and I will deactivate the snapping options, and I will press Control D, duplicate, Control D, duplicate again, click on this one, Control D, duplicate again. So now if I select this four different circle we shift, I can select this four different circle in the pass option, I will use union to create only one entity. Now if I selt this pass, shift, I selt to second pass. When I go on pass, you can find something like fracture. When I click on fracture here, I can separate in multiple area. For example, I have this area, and as you can see, I have also this area. And as you can see, it can be pretty convenient. I can also keep, for example, this area, put other colors, and in some case, it can be interesting. So this one is fracture. But if I come back at this moment and I select this one and this one, I define pass, you can find also something like flatten one or more overlapping objing into their visible pass. And in this case, I have this one, and here you don't crack a cut on this one, but only on this area, as you can see. So now let's take an example. I will come back, yes, at this moment. And something that I can do it to select this element and duplicate. So I can press Control D, and I can duplicate. I can put, for example, dark colors, and I can select this element pass. And I can select the element hoops, this one and this one. And when I go on the pass panels, something that I can do is to use, for example, difference. And thanks to that, if I move here, as you can see, you can remove this part here on this area. But something that we can use also, just before when I have this element duplicated, I can click on this one and click on this one. And when I go on pass Yes, I can select intersection. When I click on intersection, as you can see, yes, I can click on intersection, but I make something wrong because it's not this element that I want to duplicate. I'm going to show you. I want to duplicate this element. It will be pretty better. So we click on this element, Edit, duplicate. Just like that. Yes. And now I can click on this one and this one, and I will go on pass and I will select difference. I know why it is useful because I can adjust this color, maybe put another color like this one. And as you can see, we have this element. What does it mean? It means that this one I can use the same color, for example, or I can just stay here. As you can see, we follow perfectly this path, and this is why it can be pretty convenient. We can use here, this one, I can use this one, and as you can see, we can follow like this. There is multiple way to use a boolean operation and one more time in different training will reduce the boolean operation. 27. Create clones part 1: We're going to see how to work with clones. For this, something that we are going to do it is to craft an element, and for this, I will go around this area. And we will create circles. So I'll create a circle just like this. And this circle I will put the blue colors, and we are going to see how to create a clone. So to create a clone, you have different options. You can go right click and when you go right click, you can use Clone. You have also the possibility to go and it it and you can find clone. And here you have different type of options. Like the first one is create clones. Or Alt D also. I'm going to click on Crat clones, and now this element is a clone. How can know this because I have a second element created, and this type of layers is a clone layers. Why we have the original circle layers. So concretely, I have now two element. So this one is this one is a clone and this one is just our base element, but just what we are going to use. So concretely, if you click on this one and you edit the colors, just like this, as you can see, I cannot edit this one because this one is a clone. But if I click here and adjust the color, this one is my reference. So this one is my reference, I will impact this reference, just like that. So concretely, this one is a reference and this one is a clone. Now if I duplicate, I can, for example, press Control D, and I can duplicate. I can press Control to stay on the same alignment. I can also use these panels, and I can press Control D again to duplicate, press Control D again to duplicate, and I will repeat the same thing, Control D, and I will duplicate here. Control D, I will duplicate here. Control D, I will duplicate here, and I could continue Control D. I can duplicate here, Control D, I can duplicate here. I can duplicate multiple times if I need. Why it is useful to create a clone. So all these different element, as you can see, have a small symbol in front like it is a clone. It means that you can select the original element of your clone, and if you change, for example, the colors, it will impact all the clones. If you adjust, you add a stroke, for example, you create a stroke, as you can see, you will have a stroke on all the clones. So this is why it is useful. You can just edit your base and after it will be apply on all the element, just like that. If, for example, you scale, you scale this one, I decide to scale. As you can see, all the elements are going to be scale. So this is why it is useful. I can also break the ratio. So this is why it is useful to create a clone. Now, something that you can do also if you select an element separently. For example, this one, I decide to change the color. I cannot change the color. And if I scale, I can scale, but it's not going to impact anything, so it means if I reduce this one, this one will be reduced proportional. Now if you want to remove an element from a clone, you click on an element, and when you go Edit clone, you can unling the unling the clone. And when you click on Earning clone, this one is now a normal element. What does it mean? It means that we are converted this to just a normal object. And this one now is not a clone. If I click on this one, I will go on Edit Clone. You can also un clones recusively. It just like if for example, you selec multiple clones with shift, you can also just use edit clones and unlink clock reably. Now these three elements are not part of the clone. So if I adjust this one, as you can see, only the element are concerned, not this one because I unlink the clones. This is the type of thing that we can do. Let's select all the elements and Kraton are one. Now it es rectangle tools. I will, for example, craton element just here. And I will just change the color. Let's work with this red color, and I will press Control D. I will move here, left click again, create some rotation with control, and left click again, I will scale it a bit, and I will put this element here. Then I would press Control D. I will move this element just here. Yes, just like that. And I will select all the element here, I will go into pass boolean operation Union. If I select no direct tangles, I can crate and one, just here and put this one in the midals if I select all object pass union. Now I only have one icon, as you can see. If I want to change the color, I can. I'm going to Crato group as well. What I will do to rato clone I will go and it it, Clon Crato clones. Now I will press Control D, and I will duplicate. I will press Control D, I will duplicate, and I will press Control D, I will duplicate again. I can select this si element. I will press Control D, duplicate here, Control D, duplicate here, and Control D, duplicate here. So now my original clone is this one. If I change, for example, something on this one, so oops, not this one. I'm going to move. It is this one. So if I change something on this one, all the clone will be impacted. To see better, I will remove this one. I can also scan, all the clone will be impacted, but I can also edit this one inside. If I double click here, I have, for example, the sharp point, and if I move, as you can see, the sharp point will be moved as well on this area. You can also move the sharp point. You can make anything on the reference clone. So it is something also important to know. You can also create some rotation just like this, and all the elements are going to rotate. Now if I decide, for example, I select this one and I go on Edit, unlink clock or I selic maybe, this one, edit unlink clone, this one, just like this. Automatically now if I select this and I change the color, as you can see, this one and this one is not impacted because we have recuperated a pass. So this one, you have a small symbol on the front like what it is a pass. So this is why it is interesting. Now I can scale, as you can see the clone, this one are the clone, and this one is not a clone, this one is totally independent. Now it just a different entity, and it's not a part of the clone features. After I will show you for the clone that we have the possibility on the clone, you have more options here, and we can create a ti Clone. Titlon will be pretty convenient for different reasons. You can create two patterns, and this is what we are going to see after. First, let's select all press delete, and we are going to continue with the clones. A 28. Create clones part 2: We are going to continue with the clones. We have seen how to create the clones, and we are going to continue. The first thing that I'm going to do is to create rectangles, and I will define some colors, and I will create a small rectangles around here. I change a little bit of color, these blue colors, just like that, and I will scale a little bit on this direction just here. And I will craft another rectangle around, around this area, just like this. And I will make something a little bit like maybe I think this one is not convenient. I will go on the panel and I will make something a little bit darker, just like this. Then I will move a little bit, play this element around here. I will create another rectangle snapping around this area. I will change a little bit of color, also. Let's make this type of color. I think this one will make something more like this. This one may be more like this. This one may be more like this, and I will extend a little bit this one. I will click on this element, and I will press Control D, and I will duplicate here, and this one will adjust a little bit. Then we will press Control D again like this. I can go here, I can read it, and we will make something a little bit more darker as well. So we have created, for example, this element. Something that I will do is to slc all and I will create one object, just clicking on pass, and I will define union, just like that. The problem is I will recuperate all the element. So instead to do this, I will create a group. So I will go right click here or you can also create a group with multiple elements. It's possible. When you have multiple element, you can create a clone directly with all the element just like that. And if you go on this area here, as you can see, you will have multiple element created as a clone. If, for example, you create to group, I select this and I will go right click cra to group, and I create to clone from the base of the group. Edit create clone. And as you can see, it's going to work. So now I have my group and I have my clone. So this one is the clone, and this one is my original groups. So if I scale this one, the one will be scale as well. So now I'm going to, for example, I can have this base here. If this one you duplicate, you can duplicate this one. But if you duplicate, you duplicate the group, not the clones, like that. So if I want to duplicate, will be pretty better to use clones. Oh, now what we can do, what's the possibility when for example, we click we remove, for example, this one. When we click on the group, we have the possibility to go Edit clone and create tie Clone. Crap tie clone is a little bit different because you can create patterns. So we click on Crati Clone, just like that, and you can have access to these panels. These panels concretely what you can do. You can use different type of operation. The first operation is just a symmetry with a translation. Concretely, you can repeat with a number of rows and columns. And if you click on Creat, you can repeat like this. While I have this, I need to revisit the parameters, and I'm going to click on remove, and I will click on Krat again, now, because I need to visit the parameter because I use before. So here you can repeat with four columns and four rows. This is the first thing that you can do with a simple translation, but you can use also wide eight. If you use it eight, you can repeat depending on the eight that you choose. For example, I would like to repeat on 1,200 wide, and for example, on 12 us 208 frames. If I click on Creats I will click on remove first, create, I will obtain this render. And I can increase if I want to change the value, I can put more value. If I want to put, for example, two Tsan, I can put two Tsan if I want to put 100, 600 and I click on Create, I will repeat in this way. But here we don't have space between the elements. You can sic gross colon and define your weight. If I syngroin colons I can also increase more, maybe six, six, and I will obtain this window. I just come back with, for example, four and four. You can use a simple translation, but it can be something different, for example, it can be reflection plus 180 rotation. And if I just click on create, I will create this type of pattern. If I click on remove, create, I will obtain that. It can be something like, for example, reflection plus 60 degrees rotation. And if I click on create, I will obtain this type of render. So definitely, you can have multiple types of render. It can be also maybe this one, and if I click on create, I will obtain this render. Now you can have access to more options. So it means you can use a simple translation here. But after that, when you use Shift, you can create to offset because if I click on Krat I don't have any offset. So something that I can do is on the x pair rows, I can define a percentage. I can define maybe 20% and pair columns 20%. And here we define 20, and here we define 20 as well. And if I just click on Krat now I created offset with 20%. But it's just a percentage per per column, and you can create offset like this. Now, if in this area, I come back to example, I will come back to zero, just like this. And if here I will come back to zero, I can just click on Zt not rest, I will click here. 20 and here I will tap maybe 20 as well. Now I click on Create and as you can see, you can create offset only on the axis. It means you can do something like that. Then I can also switch here to zero, and this one maybe 40. And if I just click on create, I will obtain this one down. So it depends really about what you use. I can use 60, here, I can use maybe 40, and here I will use zero, and here I will use zero, for example. If I click on Create, I will be able to move like this. In this case, it is interesting if I move on pair colons like this. I can stay horizontal and vertical and definer space. And in this case, if I put 60 here and 60 here, I can repeat with a space of 60 and 60, as you can see. But you can complete. So for example, you can apply something more like a scale. You can apply difference with a scale value, and I can apply, for example, various value of scale with, for example, 20, just like that on the x axis. But it can be a small value like maybe just four and four and on the y axis can be four and also act on create, I will just increase a little bit like this. You can do a lot of things. You can even randomize. So it means I can apply maybe 12 here, maybe 12 here, and I can randomize with a percentage 20 and here on this area 20, and I can randomize as well to have different type of size. So definitely, you can use different type of things. So here is this example. And you can even add some, for example, if I just come back here, you can even add some rotation just like that. So you can put some rotation, and it can be 20%, and if I just crack you can turn like this. So you can do a lot of things. You can also randomize the rotation, and we have steel rose colon four and four. If I just come back with a value of zero, you can also add some blue opacity, per row or per color, it is same. You can make values per rose blue or also work with some transparency and you can do something like this. So definitely, you can do a lot of things, and you can also use randomize. It's same you can adjust the initial color and even stress even if this one, this one is a little bit more specific. But if you adjust, for example, the you can also change the U with this one and this one just like that. Even if you need to change the initial color, and I think this type of case is not extremely convenient. If I just click on cred for example, I just come back here, you just click on this area and as you can see, you can create various types of patterns. One more time you select your original element, you can, for example, scale like this and you can just adjust your original Th one is the original element, and as you can see, I can, this one is original element, and as you can see, we can adjust at our convenience. So this is how we can work with Ticon. 29. Create symbols part 1: We're going to see how to work with symbols. For this something that I'm going to do it is to create rectangles. I will create your rectangles here, and I will press Control to keep the ratio. Then we will zoom here and this rectangle, I will scale a little bit, and I will select these tools, the pen tools. I will switch for this mode, create a sequence of parallel line segment, and I will go a little bit inside and I will stay left click here, and I will just create multiple line maybe something like this, here, here, And here, then I would press Enter and I would go on the fill and stroke panels, and on the fill and stroke panels feel non, stroke pan, I will activate the colors. Stroke style will procus first with the west color, and I will define a value around two or the size. Maybe two is not enough. I will increase a little bit like si. And after that, I will decrease a little bit of size and I will center because I'm using on the right the snapping options. Let's do something like this. Let's crat another element. I would say the circle too, I will crat a circle just like this. And this circle, I will go on the field options, and here I will go on the stroke pad and I will activate a stroke style, and I will crat a stroke. Here, we define, for example, the red colors. And I will go on the fill option no colors, and I will play the element around here. Then I will create a rectangle just inside, and this rectangle in the fill and stroke option stroke Null, peel red colors. So I will recuperate these red colors with these tools. And then I will adjust little bits of rectangle around this area. And I will create a triangle. For this, I can select the polygon tools. I can create a polygon like this, and I will change the number of corners for three. After to do this type of work, I can go left click and I can create a rotation, and I will click here. I will increase little bits of size, and I will place my triangle around this area, just like this. I will place the triangle around here. Then I will select all the triangle, and I will place the triangle around the midle and first, I will go on the pass, and on the pass, I will define union, just like this. How to create the symbols. To create a symbol, you can create a symbol on the base of the group. But even if you don't have a group, it's going to work. So for example, I can select all the elements, and I can go on the options here. And you will find when we go on the object, you can find symbols, and you can open these panels. When you click here, you can open this panel. You can also switch the symbol panels and you can switch on the right if you need. After two switches symbol panels here, when you create a selections, you can click on the Plus on the bottom right corner to create a new symbols, and the symbols will be created as you can see. If I create frame of selection of the circles and this arrow, I can then create a new symbol, convert selected object to symbol. Now if you take a look to the layers and object, when you have a symbol, you can see the small icon on the front here. So the small icon will be the small icon of a symbol. When you go on a symbol, you can just click on the symbol here, and something interesting is now, if, for example, I delete this element. And I delete this element, my symbol are still here. So the advantage of the symbol is to recuperate element from librae. I'm going to show you after because you have multiple elements in this bray. But you can create your own symbol, and then you can just drag in and moving the symbol on this area, so I can just drag in and moving the symbol on this area as you can see. I can just drag in and moving as I want just like that. If, for example, you make transformation on this symbol, as you can see, it's not directly possible. How you can create transformation on this symbol, you can go and edit, and it links to the clone features. In the cloud features, what you can do, you can, for example, unlink the clone. When you create a symbol, at the same time, it is clone features. So you can unlink the clone. And if you decide, for example, to unlink the clone just like this, you have now the possibility to edit the symbol. And let's take a look. I'm going to show you also with this one. So this one, we have a symbol here. We have a symbol. Now if I uning the clone, I will go on layers. I will go here, and I will unlink the clone. So for this, I will go and edit unlink clones, just like this. Now a group is generated, and inside the group, I have the pass and the circle. When you unlink the clones here on the base of the symbol, after that, if you want, you can select the pass or here I can select the circles. And for example, if I want to change the color of the circle, I can change. Here it is for the fill and stroke, I can deactivate fiel, I can go on the stroke pan and I can, for example, activate a stroke. I can just click on this a and I can go fill and I will recuperate the color of the stroke that I have here and I can edit my element. As you can see, it's interesting. If I come back to my symbol, I see my symbol here. If you want to unlike a symbol, you need to as I explained before, you can take a look in the layers. Here we have these symbols and these symbols. And here we have converted the symbols into a group, and then we can edit the groups. Here it is same, I converted this symbol into a group and then I can edit the group. You can also click here. You can go in edit here. And you can go on the symbol panels on the clone panels. In the clone panels, you can unlink the clone. And if you unning the clunk, it will allow you to unlink the symbols. So this is something important to understand because at the beginning, you have the feeling how I can edit the symbols. And if you want to edit a symbol, you can do this type of for. Otherwise, the symbol act like just a simple library. So just create a symbol here and you can just drag and move the symbol at your convenience. And if you want to edit a symbol, you just need to uning the symbol from the clone panels. I'm going to click here, dragging and moving this one, here, and dragging and moving this one, just here as well. 30. Create symbols part 2: We're going to continue with the symbols. We have seen how to integrate symbols. So for this, as I've explained, you can create your element. And after to create your element, you can open the symbol panels in the object, and here you can open the symbol panels. The symbol panels will act like a library. So it means if I just go here, you have the symbols, and you can just dragging and moving the symbols, and you can place your symbols at your convenience. So here, for example, I created two symbol, as I explained before. If you want to delete the symbols, when you go right click, as you can see, you don't have any possibility. Want to remove a symbol, you can just click on Minus and when you click on Minus, you can remove the symbols. I can click here Minus and I can remove the symbols. Now if you go into layer object, when you remove the symbols, automatically it will create a copy with groups and you can recuperate your original element with a groups and inside what you have created. For example, I recuperated my original element with a circus and at the same time arrow. This one is still the symbol that I deleted. And this one is now the group with inside. I have the arrow and I have the circle. Even if you delete to symbols, automatically, it's convenient, it will create a new element just like this. We are going to select all the elements. And in this library of symbols, if I just go on the right here, in this library and symbol, you have other options. This one, you can switch, and you have a lot of type of options. First, you can click on all symbols. And if you click on all symbol set, all symbols will appear on this area. You can also select symbol by category. You want, for example, logic symbol, you can click on Logic symbols. If you want, for example, symbols for Power Power set, you can find Power set. If you want Water set, you can select Water set. If you want place or washing set, you can select this one. So all the symbol will be located here. If I come back to all symbol, all the symbols displayed in these different categories will appear here. It's convenient because you have a huge library of symbol. For example, you can find this one again and you can find this one. Just need to drag in and moving at your convenience. Let's select another one, I will drag in and moving this one here. Let's try with another symbol, like for example, we have different models of s as well, like, for example, this one, and let's continue. You have many type of thing. For example, if you want to add a bubbles, you can add bubbles. You have many types of and here I display all the different categories. Befor continue, I can find all the different categories just here. So after to understand that you can integrate symbols here. This library of symbols, when you integrate, if you want to adjust. So first, you can just select the symbol, you can scale, you can adjust at your convenience symbols. And for this, you can just press control just like that. First, you can adjust here. If you want to edit a symbol, you can take a look on this area. And as you can see, when we go here, we have a group. So automatically, we have a group created. So if I double click here, if I just want to change the color, it's possible. So it means I can click here and I can just change the color of all the symbols on the backgrounds. So this is the first thing that you need to understand. Even this one, I can define another color. But for this one, the background color will arrive here. Now it is because we have the group. So for example, we have a symbol and a group at the same time. So if you just go right click here, we have exit group. And if I exit the groups, I will go outside of my symbol folder here. Now if I double click here, as you can see, I cannot edit more. I want to edit more, I will go to the same thing, edit clones, and I will select unlink clones. Now I can have a group and inside the group, I have what compose this element. It is same if I select, for example, this one, I want to unlink the clones to be able to edit. I can click on this area, and I will go in these panels. I will go on clone and I will unlink the clones. And now a group is generated, and in this case, I have so much more element for these symbols for this base. And for example, we can click on this area, we can change the color, but I can click also I have a pass here, and if I double click, I can edit the pass. For example, if I want to adjust the bubble here, I can adjust the bubble using this one, but we are also other type of elements. So we have a pass here, when other ones, like for example, this one, or elements inside. As you can see, we have different enders and we can adjust these enders as well. Just like that. Like for example, this one. So if I zoom out, let's make something more simple. If I click on this one, if I click on this one, we can select this pass one more time. So we have this pass, and if I double click, I can enter inside the pass. And for example, I can drag in and moving this one if I want. I can drag in and moving this one if I want also. I want to address this one, I can address this one. If I want to address this one, I can adjust. So you can, for example, move the different endles. So this one concerns the pass. I can also go on the fill and stroke, stroke pain in the stroke style again if I want to reduce the size of the stroke, I can reduce the size of the stroke, as you can see. I come back to the field panels, I can select this element and I can adjust the field panels and the final dark colors. I can also double click here, and this one is just a rectangle. So if I want to adjust, I can adjust by rectangle, for example, and I can remove the rounded corner. So you can adjust like this your symbol. As you can see, it's convenient. When you go on symbol panels here, you take a look and when you take a look, you have a library of symbol accessible, definitely, you have a lot of things, so it's not only one categorized, you have a lot of type of categorized and you can just select all symbol sets. And you will have access to all the symbol here. You just need to drag in and moving on this area. And as I explained before, when you have a symbol, just change all the basic colors, just clicking on the symbol and you can change the background color. But if you want to edit, you will have to go on edit clones, and here you can unlink the cloud or shift at D, and you will be able to adjust at your convenience. So this is how you can work with the clones. 31. Add text: We are going to see how to add text. And for this, we can click on these tools, and we can add text. So the first thing that I'm going to do, if you want to start your text, you just go left click and you can tape the text that you want. For example, I will tape title and I will tape title content just like this. So why I have this render for simple reason that here I'm using a stroke. So concretely, I will go on Fill and Stroke, I will select Z text. So you need to select text like this, select fill and stroke, and on the Felix strokes, I will define stroke here, and I will deactivate the stroke, and on the field options, I will activate the color like, for example, the black color. So first things to do, you will add text like this. When I click on the text, now when you have the selection tool, you can drag in and moving the text. You can also scale the text. If you press Control, you can keep the ratio, but you can also break the ratio as you can see. If you want to edit the text again, double click and when you double click, you can edit the text again inside your frame. If I slct the text like this, I have the possibility to change first the font family. So you have a library with different font families that you can apply. So for example, if I want to change the font family, I can apply a different font family here. Then depending on the font family, you can switch for the mode as well. Here, this is the size of the text. Even if you can scale with a selection tool, you can also define size directly on this area. And if you press Enter, you can enter the size for your text just like this. After you can find some space between the lines, the adjustment inside a frame. See, this one is available if you have a frame with multiple element. So something that I will do, I will place the elements here. I will select the text tool one more time. But this time, what we can do we go left click and we will stay left click. If you stay left click, you can create a frame. And now I can tape something inside. I will adjust the size first I will reduce with maybe 16, and I will tape something inside like I will tape content. Oops, not here. I will tap on this area content. The problem is now I don't have my frame, so I will remove, I will redo again these actions. We will s the text tool, craft frame like this, and now I will tape I will tape content. Example, and let's do content. Example project, I will tape project, I will tape content. Example project, also, I will tap content example project, also, and here content. Example project also. So as you can see, we have all this text. But the frame is located here. So this one is a text, this one is a frame. So what does it mean? It means that if I select just like this, as you can see, you can work with adjustment. Hling center inside your frame, hing right inside your frame or justify inside your frame. I will come back to Allin left. Here, as I explained before, you can also change the unit for the text. If you prefer to work in pixel, you can work in pixels. Here, we have the size. So it means this is the spacing between the different line, as you can see, so you can adjust the space. And one more time, it can be between the line, but you can work also with a different value. So it means if I want to be in pixels, I can adjust the size with a pixel value. It's also a possibility. You have also the possibility when you go on the right, here, it's more advancing, but you can switch your text here it's horizontal. So you can switch your text vertical, just like this. You can switch your text vertical text just like this here as well, on this area. And depending on what you choose them, I will reduce little do size. I will tape my text with maybe 30 here. So you can change as you can see the text on these directions, and you have the orientation, this orientation, or you can work with this orientation as well. So you can adjust the different orientation. If you want to come back, you can come back here on this area. Left to right text, right to left text as well, left to right, right to left. Just like that here, it's a little bit more advanced feature. So it means you can adjust the space between the letters. If, for example, I increase again this size with a value of 60, you go in the options, and as you can see, you can increase the space between the letters. Here, you can also define some space between the words, this one is the letter, this one is the world. This is the type of thing that you can. After that, if I select this, now, the frame will be cropped to the content, as you can see. So my frame has been cropped to the content. If I come back to these tools just like this, you have the possibility when you have a text to go on the field options, and you can define color for the text. But you can also define stroke so I can click on Stroke and I go on the stroke style, and I can define stroke as well. So if I define stroke, stroke pain, I can activate the color. Now we have this green color, and I will define the stroke style and I will reduce the stroke style. And thanks to that, you can also add a stroke your content, as you can see, just like that. If I don't want to stroke, I click on Stroke and I can deactivate the stroke. So if I press delete on the keyboard here, I will create a rectangle. I have the snapping option activated. I will create a rectangle on the top here with a color, and I will define the red color. Then I would like to play something like a title inside. I will scan a little bit this rectangle. I will select the text tools, and I will go left click here. I won't tape any frame just left click and I will tape one more time. Title content here. I will use my selection tool because the color is the same as the rectangle. I will go in the field options and I will define the wise color. Then if I Scan, I can scale here, but I can also double click, select the content inside. And as you can see if I want to change the size or tape something, I can change the size. I can tape, for example, 120. And if I want to adjust with different option, I can I can place the center. So here, it's pretty convenient. You can directly snap to the center of the rectangle. So it's pretty fast to place, for example, your text in the middle of the rectangle, just like this. Each time you will have a text layers, and oops, I think I have some frame layer. You need to separate because when you have a text layer, this one is a basic text layers. But when you create a frame, for example, you do something like this and you tape something inside, it's a little bit different. You have a frame just like that. W means if I tap one more time, I'm going to show you I will click on the text, I will press delete. I'm going to show you and I will click here, and I will tap something content. Example one more time. I will select all the text just here, and I will reduce the value to maybe 60. I will change for the fill options, I will put the black color. And as you can see, we are inside the frame, just like that. So because we are inside a frame, if I come back to my layer here, you can see we have this one and we have the text inside. We have the frame and we have the text inside. But if you click on, for example, you select the frame, you go on the filling stroke, you can adjust on all the elements, just a little bit different. There is no big difference, but sometimes it can be useful to have only this type of text or only this type of frame. 32. Text curve: We're going to see how to add text on pass for this something that I'm going to do. First it is to select the text tools, and I will go left click here and I will tap title. Content example. After to type title content examples, if I go on the right here on the fill and stroke panel, I think I have a stroke, so I will remove the strokes, and if I just define the field colors, I just go back with the black colors. After that, I can select font family on the top. So we have different type of font family. I can come back to something basic like for example, this one, and with these tools, I can, for example, scale using control. So after to do this work, let's create a pass because we need to put the text on a pass. So to create a pass, I will adc, for example, the pen tools. And I will go, for example, left click here. Left click on this areas. I think the pass is not convenient because I need to switch for this spot. So left click here. Left click, I will create to curve, stay left click and left click and I will create to curve again. I will press Enter. I will go on the fill and stroke panels, feel non stroke paints. I will click here. I will define a color like the black color and for the strokes un to, it would be pretty convenient. Then I will sllist tools, no tools to adjust little bits of pass just like that, and I will just put something maybe like this. So after that, something that we can do is to select, we have the text here. First, I will decrease little bits of size because little too big. And I will put the text on this one. So how to do this, you select the text, you press Shift, you select the pass, and you go in the pass features and on the pass features on the text features, you can use put on pass, put on Pass. When I click here, as you can see the text will be now directly linked to the pass. I go to the layer object, you just to you have the text here, and inside, you have a text pass inside the text. It means it links to the pass. Now what we can do, we can, for example, move the text. And if we move the text, as you can see, I'm going to show you if you select the text, drag and moving the text, as you can see, you follow this one. Maybe I can deactivate the snapping options and you keep the shape of the pass. At the same time, if you select the pass and you use a note tours, you adjust the pass, the text will be adjusted as well. As you can see, you can adjust the pass, and if you adjust the pass, the text will be adjusted as well. Now, if you slick the text, you have the possibility to click on the text. You can edit the text. You can also scan the text. 80 sees you press Control to scale the text. You can scal the text just like this, and it will continue to follow the pass, just like that. Now, if you want to remove, for example, the text or for something else, you can do it can select the pass and you can just hide the pass. Thanks to that, you can just see on your text and you don't need to see the pass, so it is something possible. If you want to remove the text from the past, you select your text just like this. You go into text features, and you have removed from pass and you will recuperate the text automatically as before. It's a little second example. I will remove here, I would say the text tools and one more time, I will tape tighter content example one more time. After to do this type of work, I will go on the filling stroke, and I will go on the stroke style and the stroke style. I need to remove the stroke for this are going stroke paint, I will remove. And I will burn the fill options, I will activate a color like the black color one more time. Then this time, I will create something like a circles. I'll create a circle here. I will change the colors and I will, for example, place the circle in the Midor. I can activate one more time the snapping option, place my circle here, and with pit title content example. And I would like to put this on the circle. So how to do this, I select the text shift, I select the circles, and I will go on pass here. And on the pass feature, something that I can do it is to activate on the text features button pass. The text will appear stress here. Now I have the possibility if I select the text, I can select the text here, left click Left click again, and I can, for example, rotate. The prime of the rotation is, as you can see the rotation is not pretty good, but if I move the cender point and I move the cender point here in the midel now I can rotate and I can place here. But I think the rotation point is not pretty good. Let's take a look and I can, for example, move on this way just like this. I will just go back here. And as you can see, I can change. I will take a look about the options that I have here, and I can change the location object rotation center, for example, on this area, the center. I think on this area, this one is not good, and maybe this one is more in the center. And if I rotate, now it's going to work. So I just need to define the right center. And I can put, for example, the text here. If you want to offset, you can just move a little bit and you can press control to stay on the same axis, and I can, for example, move a little bit here. If I scale the text, it is also a possibility. I can sche the text from the center sing shift and control, and I can scal the text from the center, for example. And as you can see, we can obtain something like this. Something that I can do it is to click on the circles and on the circles, I can just on the layer and optic panels, I can deactivate the view the circles. And in this case, I will find only the text. You know what I can do, I can also select the text. And on the text features here, if I want to remove from pass, I can click on remove Front pass. And now my text will appear here. I can go left click, I can come back with, for example, a different level of rotation. If I select the pass, I can recuperate pass like this. This is how we can put text on pass. 33. Master colors: We're going to see how to work with colors. And for this, I will create a rectangles. I will select the rectangle tool and I will create a rectangles on this area. So this rectangle, I will place my rectangles around here, as you can see. And how we can work with colors. You have different type of options. So first option is when you go here, you have these color panels. And with these color panels, you can in a very fast way select any basic color. So you have a lot of colors that you can choose for these panels. Don't forget that you can also extend a little bit here to have access also to more color. So here we are on the top, but you can scroll down. And when you scroll down, you can have access to more color as well. You can also place the black color. Here you can see the black colors, and here you can see the white color. Like you have also different value between the white and the black color. So here, black color and this one white color. This is the first way to add basic colors. Now, as I explained before, we have the fill and stroke panel just here. Because we can play the fill and stroke panel object, you can activate fill and stroke. Because we use a lot, I think it's pretty convenient to keep the panels here. You can also click on this area. And when you click on this area, you can find also the fill and stroke panels, as you can see. And thanks to that, we can play this panel here. When we go on the fill option just here, you can activate a color inside the shell, but also for the stroke. If I select the field option, you can also fill with a gradient. I will explain the gradients in a separate way. Here we have flat colors. Plus by default, what we use. We use this type, this is the saturation luminosity value. But you have also different type of way. So if you use this one, you have a U saturation luminosity value here. But if you try another one, like for example, this one, it will be different. Or if I select for example, this one, the RGB, we can search a color on the different channels, red channel, green channel, book channels, and transparency channels. So if we use this one, how you can search a color. First, you can define the main range of color on this area that you want. For example, it can be some orange color. And inside, you can define the orange color that you want. In this corner, for example, you will have the white color. In this corner, the black color, and in this corner, your orange color that you pick. And you can also go from white to black with different type of color. You can then adjust with a saturation losity value. So what is it is to pick the main range of colors, like, for example, blue. The saturation, it is your level of saturation of your colors. The luminosity, it is to make something lighten or to darken your color with a luminosity value, and this one is a transparency value. You can reduce the transparency value with this one. You can also even change the opacity here, but this opacity will be even at some blue on your element just like this, as you can see, but this one will be more on your layer object. So it is something also that you need to know. And I can decrease the opacity also from my layer object, just like this. Here you can switch any pass self intersection, but in this case, we are going to keep this one, and this is how you can add a color on the element. As you can see, it can be pretty convenient, just like that. If you want to add, for example, a rectangle on the background with a color, you can just click on the rectangle tools. You can snap the option here. You can create a rectangle snapping from this corner to this corner, and you define the color that you want. For example, I can define this color. Then I will select the rectangle tools again. I will create another rectangle on this area, and I can define also color from these panels, as you can see. You can also choose a color first here, and after select your rectangle, the color is selected. And as you can see, I can create anoer one. I'm going to deselect first, select the rectangle tools, select another one, like for example, this one, snap here, and I can crat anoer color as well. On any element, you can do the same type of thing with, for example, a stroke pain. So it means you can use stroke pain. You can activate color, and you can define a color also for the stroke. And on the stroke side, you can define the size of the stroke. I will explain more in details after. If you don't want to fill, you click on fill, and you can deactivate the fill value. I'm going, for example, to remove my rectangle on the back with delete on the keyboard. And here, as you can see, we don't have any color inside. You can also come back and feel recuperate the color, stroke paint, deactivate the color just like this. So now what I'm going to do, I'm going to remove all this element. And I wanted to show you also how to recuperate color. Let's select a first rectangle with maybe this color, maybe a second one with this color, maybe a third one with this color, and maybe a last one with maybe this color. If you want to recupate the color, you can see these tools, this is a draw pair tools. And thanks to that, you can pick a color. And if for example, I click here, automatically you can recupate this color. But if I want to apply this color on the object, you select the objects that you want. For example, I select this object. And if I define these tools, just the pick color tools, I can activate this color on this object, as you can see. But when you go in the field options, you have also these tools appearing here. So for example, I can click on these rectangles. In my field panels, I can recuperate also the tools, pick color form image, and I can click on this one as well. So this is the type of things that you can do also to recuperate the color. You can also here this is am pick. But when you if I slate for example, this rectangle and I slick this too, you can switch for asm. So for example, you select this element and you click on this tool, you can Assn. And in this case, if you activate Assing, you can assyn the color that you have choose just like this. For example, I can define this one. I can go on Assing and I can assing for example, this color to have all my rectangle in red as well. So this is how you can recuperate to color Al sometimes it's convenient, as you can see. 34. Create gradients: We're going to see how to create gradients. For this something that we can do to create gradient, we can click on these tools, and this is the gradient tools. To activate this gradient tool first, I will create an object. I will see the rectangle tools, I will create rectangle like this and we will see how to apply a gradient on these rectangles. So to create a gradient on a shape, you select the shapes, you activate the gradient tools, and you can start with left click here. First things to understand, you can create a new linear gradient, but you can also create a radial gradient. I will select linear gradient and left click to start a gradient just like this. After to do this type of work, you can edit your gradient with these panels using the gradient tools. But you have also the possibility to go into fill and struck panels, and automatically, you will be radirected to slinear gradient. So for example, if you are like this with some basic color, can also how you deactivate the color, you can also switch for the linear gradient clicking here, and automatically, you will be at the same time redirected to adjust your gradient. Even if you have your selection tools, and for example, you don't have any color and you decide to apply your gradient, you can edit the gradient from these panels, but it's pretty better to complete with the linear gradient tool with the gradient tool, so I can go left click here. So first you have two handles, the handles, and this one. So if I select the first handle, this one, I can define the color of my first stop, and I can go in the color wheel and I can define a color. For example, I will define the blue color. Now, if I want to select the second stop, I can click on the stop here, or I can also click on this panel. Here you can select the first stop or you can select the second stop with the end and I will define another color like the orange. Well, it's not extremely good because the second handle by default, is at a transparency of zero as you can see. And if you want to recuperate the transparency, you can put 100 and in this case, I can see my orange color you can find this first step, second step, just like this. You can then adjust the point, so it means you can change the position of the blue and change the position of the orange to radio just like this. You can also move this point here and move this point here if you prefer directly with the gradiut tools. And thanks to that, we can create less transition or we can create more transition just like this. I move this point and if I move this point. How to change the position of your gradient, you can just select the point here and you can move this point or you can move this point as well, and thanks to that, you can change the position of your gradient, like for example, horizontally or again vertically. You have also the possibility when you are here to turn your gradient from this panel. So each time you can move directly on the object, or you can also have access to the different options. Here, you can define also orientation value. If I want, for example, 45 degrees, I can take 45 degrees. You can flip the gradient reverse the directions, and you can also rotate the gradient 90 degrees as you can see, it's also a possibility. If you want to add more point on your gradient, it's possible. Concretely, you can go plus here, left click and you can add a new point. And here I created a new point and I can define another color. But you can also add plus here, left click, double click here, and you can add another point also on this direction. And now I have a gradient with more point and I can move this one. I can move this one. You can also drag in moving here. And as you can see, we have a total of four different points. To remove a point, you just click on a point here, and you press delete on the keyboard and you can remove a point just like that. You click on a point, press delete on the keyboard, and you can remove a point as well. Here you have the possibility to see the different gradients that you will have on your document, and this is why we have a gradient library here. So you can also repeat your gradient. You have repeat here, direct, just like that. For example, if I reduce here, I can repeat my gradient like that, but you can also use reflective. You can also do the same type of things you have here, you can, for example, reverse the gradient. You can also repeat the gradient on this area, so you can have the same type of options also on this area. Now accurate this gradient. I will press delete on the keyboard. If I select the circle tools, I will create the circle tools because you can create also a radial gradient. So I can select the gradient tool, switch here you can create a gradient also directly in the stroke, but I will show you when we will work with the stroke, and here it is in the field. If I see create radial here, elliptic or circular gradient, just like this, you can go in the fill and stroke. You can also start your gradient in a radial way. But here, as you can see, I'm on the stroke, so I will come back to the field value. And if I want to remove the gradient for the stroke, I will need to go in the stroke pan and to remove the stroke because you can apply also on the stroke. If I select the field here, in the field now I started my gradient just like that. And it is the same. I can select two color. My first one will be maybe this type of color. And then my second one, you can select the second stop here, but it corresponds to this print as well, and the second one will be more some orange color. One more time, we have a transparency at zero here. So if I want to see all the color, I need to switch the transparency to, for example, 100% here. I can dragging and moving the center point here. This one I can extend my point for this color, and this one it is another handle to turn your gradient. Here you can change the position. Here you can turn, and here, this one is just another point for the second color. You can create something like a sphere using this type of process. So now if, for example, you want to create a gradient on the backgrounds. For example, clear blue background to dark blue background. You can select the rectangle tools, you activate the snapping options, and I can, for example, snap from this corner until this corner point. Then I will select the gradient tools. We will switch for cratlinear gradient, and I will start my gradient like this. I will select my first stop, whether I can click here, but I can also select the stop here or the stop here or the stop directly here as well. I'll define a first color like this type of blue color maybe on the back just like this. And I will select the second stop. And the second stop, I will place a clear blue color. But if I want to have the transparency at 100, I need to activate the transparency here, 100. And now, as you can see, I have a maximum of transparency, and I can adjust at my convenience the tools this colors just like that. And thanks to that, I can create, as you can see, gradient for my backrooms just like this. But you can also extend outside depending on what you want to do. That's here. So this is how we can create gradient. 35. Create meshes: We're going to see how to use mesh tools. For this, something that I'm going to do it is to create a rectangle so we see the rectangle tools, and I will create rectangle just here. Then I will select the selection tools and to create a mesh, you can go on this area and you have the mesh tool. As I've explained before, you can change the colors of your shape. You can create gradient on your shapes and you can also edit mesh. When I click here, I can have access to these panels, and you can create a mesh gradient, conical gradient and you apply this on fill, and you can do the same thing on stroke. In this case, they just apply to mesh gradient and fill. You can define the number of rows and the number of columns. For example, if I define two and two, you just need to double click, and when you double click, you will be able to create a grid with two rows and two columns. After do this type of work, you have multiple point and this point you can adjust. I feeling so panel. So concretely, when you select a point with a circle, you can just adjust a point like this. But when you select to point here, point with something like a polycon, it is different. You can adjust the color. So for example, in this case, I can put the green color on this area. If I select this one, I can, for example, select the blue color. If I select this one, I can select the purple color. If I select this one, I can select the orange color. Then if I select this one, I can selict for example, this color just like this. If I select this one, I can selict another type of color, maybe I can selt one, this one. So after to do this type of work, after to do this type of work, as you can see, I place multiple types of color. Even in the middle here, I have also this element and to adjust the color I can adjust. You can just dragging and moving the different point at your convenience, and this is how the mesh gradient work. You can see different point and then you have different handle to adjust at your convenience inside. And this is the type of things that you can do. As I explained, you can also change the grid. So it means you can take more element and you can adjust with more element. I'm going to show you, for example, a craton direct tangles, I select tangles, and I'm using the mesh tools. If I define six and six, double click, as you can see, I have a lot of dub options. So by default, you will have the color that you choose on wise backgrounds, and you can adjust all the colors. For example, I can see this one and I can put in red, or I can select this one and I can put in red. So you have definitely a lot of type of options. I'm thinking that you can do also if I six the rectangle tools, and I'm using these tools. It is to apply this on gradtal stroke. When you double click, you can use a stroke paint can activate colors and use a stroke style. And on the stroke style features that can increase, maybe I will put 26 just like this. And when you double click here, as you can see, you can apply your mesh gradient on a stroke. At the same, you can, for example, click this one. And on the fill and stroke, you can define some colors just like this. And it will be applied only on the stroke as you can see. And if I select this one, it will be applied only on the stroke. So you can repeat also this process only on the stroke, just like that. Now, if I select another options, I will create a circle, so I will press control, and I will create a circle keeping the same ratio. I will go on the stroke pen, I will deactivate, I will go on the fill options. Here I have the red colors. I will define these tools. And something that I can do, so I will define the number of fence columns. Let's define, for example, two and two. I will activate two crato gradients in the field, and in this case, I will switch for this mode, rat conical gradient. And here you have Edit Src mesh and fill mesh, left click and you can see I can edit the color like this. For example, handle in the milder, so I can click on this handle, I can define a color. But here, for example, I can define a color like this one. Here, I can define another one, like for example, this one. Here, I can define another one, like for example, this one, and here I can define another one, like, for example, this one, so we can just change this different color. And we can also dragging and moving. So we have different handles. Ig dragging and moving these handles, for example, if I want, but I can also just keep the handles here. This one is handle with a polygon, but you can also drag and moving only the different point just like that. This is something that you can do as well. I can define this white color, but if I want to define the red color, I can also. So definitely, you have a lot of type of options. So every time you can just click on your element, select the mesh gradient tools. And with this tool, you can adjust, you have multiple types of handles, and you can adjust at your convenience. You can also use on the top right corner of the snapping option. If you want to snap, for example, handle to something, it is definitely possible. And you have multiple types of options here. So the option by default, it is to create a mesh gradient and also to create gradient in the field. So it's okay with the grad 36. Edit strokes: We're going to see how to work with strokes. And for this, something that we can do. It is to select the pen tools, and first, we will create curves. So I will go here and I will create first curves with Left click. Then left click again. I will stay Left click to create an element like this, and I will go around this area and I will press enter. So automatically, when we fill with a color and you only have something like a pass, you will obtain this render. So what I will do, I will go in the fill and stroke panels, and in the fill and stroke panels, as I explained, you can edit the stroke. First, if I want to remove the color, I will deactivate fill and I will click on none. And thanks to that, I don't have anything. If I want to activate the stroke, I will click on stroke paint, and we can switch for flat color, and we can activate a stroke on this pass. So after to do this work, one more time, you can define the color. So you have the color wheel, and you can define the color that you want on this area. For example, I want the black color, I can put the black color. Let's create something like some blue color here. You will be able also on a stroke to create a gradient, so you can switch for the linear gradient. Thanks to that, you can also create a stroke with a gradients, can define the first stop, the second stop as well, you can increase the level of transparency and you can do this for linear gradient, but you can also create a radial gradient or you can feel a stroke with the different options that you have. If now I come back to the flat color and for example, this blue color. To edit the stroke paint, we can go in strokes time. First, I will come back to the black color and I will go on strokes time. First things to understand, you can work with a white. Here we can decrease the size of the stroke as you can see with a white. You can tap directly a value. If for example, I want 12, I can apply for 12. You can also change the unit where millimeter, if you prefer to work, for example, in pixels, you can work in pixels. You can adjust with the value that you want. You need to understand when you work with a stroke like this with a pass and not a shapes, you can change the cap. So by default, we have a square cap. So it means here, I have the handles, and we have the cap just outside like this. You can switch for round cap, and here we have rounded cap, as you can see, and you can switch for butt cap, so it means we have the sharp point here and we have directly the end on this area. So this is a suit type of things that we can have for the ending or the beginning of your pass. If you want to crack dashes, it's possible. I'm going to reduce little bits of wide here, so I will reduce. I will tap something like seven, and I will change the dashes. So you have multiple types of options. You can make small dashes, you can make longer dashes. You can also do something like this. So you have multiple options. And while you have a pattern here for a simple reason that if, for example, I use these dashes, you can also try Noder one, you have multiple ways. So you can try multiple types of dashes here. Something that I wanted to show you if I select, for example, this one, not this one, I think it's too big. I will try ander one. Let's just come back eventually. This one, I will reduce little bit the size at six. If I try this one. Let's just try this one. Here you have a pattern. So pattern, what is this? It is the size of each die. And the space between each dashes. If, for example, I tap six here, and I tap space and six, I will have six for the size of the dash, six pixels and a space of six. But if I create two and six, the size of the dash will be two and the space six. And you can repeat with more after I can tap four space and eight. And after that, I can tap, for example, ten space and six. So you can adjust and create to sequence just like this using the pattern sequence just here. If you don't want any things like this, you can come back just with a basic line. You can even define a marker at the beginning, so this one will be at the beginning. This one will be at the end. For example, I can crowd arrows at the beginning and the end and here between each sharp point in the mid, for example, if I click here, I define my in sharp point, and as you can see, I have sharp point on this three area. So this is why when you go here, you define something, it will replace at each sharp point as you can see. If I don't want anything here, I will just go back to the first options, just like that. This is the type of things that we can do as you can see, just like that. I don't want arrow, I can come back here and on this one, I can come back here. So it is how you can edit a stroke. It works for any type of pass but also when you work with the shape. So I'm going to show you with a shape. So what we will do we see the rectangle tools. We'll create a rectangle like this. So one more time, this rectangle, you can go in the fill option. If you want a color, you can fill with color as you can see. If you want a stroke, you go in the stroke can deactivate the stroke or activate the stroke. When you activate the stroke, you have also the possibility to define a color. Let's define the blue. And if I define the stroke style, I can define the thickness of the stroke. So here, if I want to, for example, increase, I can increase as well. If I want to remove the color, the field color, I can click on feel and remove. Now, when you have something like this, in the corners, you go in the struck style, what you can see, you can see is the drain. And so the cap will be when you have something open, like, for example, a curves or line, and the drain is when you have something close, and you can switch for val drain. Bron drain or meter drain. Here, depending on what you choose, sometimes it will adjust, but in this case, it's not extremely useful, but sometimes you can adjust when you have something like a Bavel and use this one, you can switch when you increase depending of the stroke. For example, I use zero automatically, a Bavel will be created like that. If for example, I increase again, as you can see, we recuperate this type of element just like this. So after to do this type of work, you can also have the order. If I come back to the fill options, I will activate the color. As you can see, we are inside, if I double click, the shop point is here, but as you can see, we have the limit little bit inside. What you can do when you go in the stroke style, you can order fill stroke markers, stroke fill markers. And here, this one is field marker and stroke. Markers feel struck, stroke markers, feel, and markers stroke feel. So most of the time we'll use the first one for the fill option, the stroke and the markers. But sometimes in some case, you can switch, so it is also something important to. As you can see, we can do something like that. If I go in the field and I come back no value, I will just crack struck on this area. This is how we can work with struck. I will click here and I will delete. 37. Add guides: We're going to see how to add guides. So for this, something that we can do, you can see on the top, we have the rulers, and you can see also on the left, you have this ruler. And thanks to that, you can create horizontal guide and you can create vertical guide. So to create a guide from these different rulers, what you can do, you can just go left click here and you can dragging and moving guide just like this horizontal you can drag in and moving vertical guides as well. If you zoom a little bit, when you have your selection tools, you can adjust the position of the guide when you are on a guide, you have a small end appearing and you can just drag in and moving the guide at your convenience. If you want to improve your precision, you just need to zoom and you can take a look about the value. I have a document 1,000 201,600 pixels by 1,200 pixels, and you can adjust the position of the guide using this ruler if you want to improve your precisions just like that. This is how you can crat a kind. You can zoel out. I can cate another one or I can just create another wine on this area. Now if you want to use the guide, if I deactivate further snapping options and I create rectangle just like this, as you can see, I cannot snap to the guide. For this, you go on the top right corners and on the top right corners, you can enable snapping, and on the snapping option, you have guidelines. If you activate guidelines, here at the same time I have page borders and pen margins, and if you activate guidelines, what you can do, you can just snap to the guide. And for example, I can snap here because I'm using snap to the guide. Let's just go on this area. I will snap here, and I will create a rectangle around this area. I will crat anoder one, and I can snap to the guide and the page borders at the same time and I will define, for example, this yellow color. Then I will crat another one, just here. Then I will crate another rectangles, I will define another colors. Then I will crat another rectangles, let's create another colors, and I will define another ones, and I will create an colors just like this. You have also the possibility when you go on the file options, you have the document properties. So I'm going to show you again, file options, document properties. In the document properties, what you can have, you can have the guide options and you can see show guide. So if you deactivate show guide, as you can see, the guide won't be on this area. So you can deactivate all the guide with show guide here. You also log HL guide. If you log guide, it's not going to be possible to adjust the position of the guide, and you can see on this area, we don't have a point. We have a small element like this, like what it's not possible to adjust the guide. If we deactivate, now we can return to a print. We can find also the guide colors and the Atlight color. So guide colors and Atlight colors, just like this. After to do this type of work, you have also the possibility to create a guide around the current page. And when you click here, you can do something like this. As you can see now, I created guide around the current page. Sometimes it's useful if you want to make different snapping options. Even if on the top right corner, we have the possibility to snap to the page border, the page margin. So it's not extremely useful in this case, but sometimes it can be useful. So this is why you have these features. If you want to address, you're going to file you select the document properties. And in the document properties, you define guide, and you can activate Show guide, log all guide, create guide around the current pages, and you can even change the color. Here, I'm not going to change the color, but it's possible. If you want to remove only one guide, to remove only one guide, you select a guide, and you just dragging and moving outside just like this. So you select a guide and you're dragging and moving outside. And thanks to that, you can remove a guide. So this is the first options. The second options, if you want to remove a guide, the second options it is if you want to remove all guides, you can go into file document properties. And in the document properties, you can sell guides. And here you have the possibility to delete all guides. Concretely, here, if you click and delete A Guides, as you can see in real time, the real time, all the guides will be deleted and you can do something like this. So as you can see, it's convenient also when you do this type of work. That's it. So you want to add a guide, you just select the horizontal rulers and you can create horizontal guide just like this. You can create a vertical guide. After if you need, you can adjust the position of the guide at your convenience. If you want to edit the guide, Options, you go on the top right corners, not the guide options to guide snapping options and you can find guidelines on this area. If you activate enable snapping, it will be enable. To remove only one guide, you just dragging and moving outside like this. You select a guide to dragging and moving outside. If you want to remove guides, you want to remove guides, something that you can do it is to select this option file, document properties of file, document properties. And in the document properties here, they have the possibility to select guides and to delete all guides just like this. So this is how we can work with the 38. Add grid: We are going to see how to work with grid. For the first thing that we're going to do it is to go on this area. And when you go on view here, you can see how to work with a grid and you can display the He grid here. When I activate here, a grid is automatically generated. This grid we can edit, how to edit the grid, you need to go on the file features on the document properties and on the document property, you can find grid. After to select grid, automatically, you have the grid that you have generated. If you want to remove the grid, you click on remove. Even if you display the grid, if you don't have any grid in the document property, nothing will happen. Concretely, you have three type of grid, rectangular axonometric modular. If I click on rectangular, I can define a rectangular grid. Here on this area, you can define the spacing of the grid. For example, I can change the spacing if I want to apply ten, I can apply ten, and here I can apply ten as well. You have also the major grid between, and you can just change that as well. And this will allow you to adjust the size of the grid. For the grid, you have enable visible snap to visible grid line only show dots instead of line. So you can put dots if you prefer. And I will just here and I will display the dot. If you don't want dot, you select to document properties, and on the document properties, I can adjust here. So for example, I can select here, the guide property and the GAD properties, I can just change the grid. And in this case, I will remove show dots instead of line. I will click here and I will just remove Showdt instead of line. Now we have the grid, and if I want to snap to the grid, I will go on the top right corners, and on the top right corners, I will change the options. What options we can have, we can have the options here. So here we have the grids and we can display the grid lines. So if I just deactivate the grids and if I deactivate the grid lines and I define, for example, rectangles. I select the rectangle tools, I can create rectangles, and I'm going to want to snap here. As you can see, it's not possible. I can on snap on my page for simple reason that I display this. So now what I can do if I want to snap to the grid that we go the top right corners, and I will activate grid. And here the grid line will be activated. Now I can use the grid, I can snap for example on this area. And if I extend the size of the rectangle, I can extend here, here, and I can just snap to the grid. Let's grate another rectangle, snapping on this area, order one, snapping on this area. And I will create another one snapping here. Then I will change the color. This one I will define a first color. This one I will define a second color, this one I will define a third color, and this one I will define a four color. This is the first type of breed that we can create. If I remove the different rectangle, let's see the second type of grid. I will go on the file options. I will select the document properties here, and in the document properties, I will define an dark grid. So I can crack dark grid here. For example, I can crat axonometric grid, and when I crat axonometric grid, the second grid will be on the first one. If I don't want to have this one on the first one, I will remove the first one. This second grid, this one is axonometric grid. I can define one more time the spacing, so I can change the spacing on the y axis for 20, and I can just change the measure grid line every, and I can adjust maybe with a value I can increase with a value like ten, and I can just change the spacing. If I just come back with a spacing of zero, I will change the angles maybe 40 on the x axis, 40 on this axis and 40 on this axis. Now, what I can do I can, for example, just get out and I can crater not a rectangle, I can use pain tools. And with the pin tools, I can, for example, snap to one of Mitrit I can create something isometric. For example, I can create a rectangle, snapping this point to this point, I just snap to this one, and I will snap to this point. I will snap to this point and I will snap to this point. We can fill with a color. We go in the philantro panels. I will activate, for example, the blue colors, and I will define no errors. Rectangles. I will snap to the handles one more time. We can zoom, we can snap to this handle. I think we didn't snap on this area. I will snap here. I will go on the top right corners and on the top right corner. I think it's not snapping very well on this area, so I'm going to adjust just like this. I think it's okay. Let's just select one more time the pen tools and I will crater a line from this point to maybe it can be maybe it can be this print just like this and we can snap to one of the print and we can snap to this print and we can just go back here. I will adjust with another blue colors and I will create another rectangle snapping here to here, this one, this one, and this one, and I will define another type of blue color. And thanks to that, I can create something in SWD. I will set all the element. I will scale little bit this element. And as you can see in the layer object will have sweepers, and I will go right click. I will create a group, and thanks to that, I have this object. I can go into five Osha document properties. In the good document properties, I can work with a grid. So the last type of grid that we can create, it is a modular grid. So for example, this one I can remove, so I can select this one. And the last type of grid is a modular grid. So you can create a new modular grid. You can also create a multiple grid just as you can see. When you have a grid, you can just, for example, we this one and this one will be a modular grid. And as you can see, when you have a modular grid, you can do something like this. You can, for example, crater rectangles, and this one is a modular grid. But we have also directly on the back, we have still the axonometric grid. If I just come back, I will select pile. I will go into document properties, and I will select grid, and I will remove, for example, the rectangular grid. Every time when you add a grid just like this, you can add a new grid and the new grid will be displayed on the older one, just like that. I can extend a little bit this one. So if you want to remove, you can remove. I can remove all this type of grill. And now I will come back here. I have, for example, this element. And as you can see, we can have this type of option thanks to the grid. If I press Control D, I can create another one. Just like this, I can even press Control D, create another one, and I can just adjust on my convenience. So this is why it is great. If I just define this one, you can go into document properties one more time into document property, you can activate the grid. We can define another modular grid. You can define the different options here one more time. And if I define a rectangle, as you can see, you can snap with this modular grid. Modular grid, you can have directly a gutter between and you can adjust the gutter at your convenience. Is how you can work with a grid. 39. Master alignments: We're going to see how to work with aligment. For this, something that I'm going to do it is to select the rectangle tools and I will create the rectangles here. Then I will scale this rectangles and I will work with the alignment. So to work with the alignment, first option is to go on the top right corners and on the top right corners, we have enabled snapping. So if I enable snapping, I can, for example, enable two different options like for example, the page border or the page bar or the page margins just here. So concretely, if you enable this type of snapping, you can find directly the center. So I can find directly the center of my document. I can also snap to the top left corner on the bottom right corners, and I can align also horizontally, or I can align also vertically. This is the first thing that we can do with the alignment. You can just use the top right corners and you can use the snapping uptit. The other way is to use ling and distribution panels. Concretely, I'm going to deactivate this one, select this area, and on this area, I will define lined and distribute. After to define Allen and distribute, I will have these panels. If you want to display the panels, you can just dragging and moving on the top right corners just like this. But what we have in the panels, we can g to relative to something. So by default, we have relative to page. So coptly I have my object here, and I can adjust this rectangle to the page. So the base will be the page, and you have different options just below. If I go on the left, I can align to the left like this or to the right like this for simple reason that we have also alignment handles and move in selection here. So kitly if we change that, we can use Alink to page, and we have link handle with certi. And if we go left click here, we'll go on this area. And if we go left click here, we'll go on this area. Now if I want to center, I can go in the center here and I can go in the center on this area also. So now let's just deactivate the element. So if you want to go on the left, you can go on the left, you want to go in the right, you can go in the right as well. Now the options here, when you click on relative to, you have page and drawing and you can have multiple type of elements. If I go on the left, I will go around this area. If I want to center, I will click here and I will click here. So now if we work with, for example, two object, I have first rectangles, and I will create a second one. And I would like to align my second right tangle to the first one. One more time, you can use these panels, enable snapping. And in this case, automatically, you can center. You can go in the top left corner, top right corner. You can align at your convenience, it's not a problem for simple reason that you use enable snapping and you have different type of options like for example, bonding box, edge corner, edge midpoint center. Now if we don't use this, for example, I don't use this. The aim is to select the two rectangles. I will sele the two rectangles and after you can change relative to. If you sell it relative to page, you can one more time center, but this is not really what I want to do. If I don't want to use relative to page, I just want to align this rectangle to this one. I will select the two rectangles and after to select the two rectangles, I will switch relative to. Here we have different option like last selected for selected biggest object, smallest object. So it depends on the situation. In this case, I will select, for example, the biggest object. So my base will be the biggest rectangle. And after I can go, for example, on the left, or I can go on the right, or I can go on this area, and I will define, for example, center and center. You have also option here like the grid, and you have also option here like circular. But here's a little bit more specific. We'll see that in a different way. So if I use Allen just like this, I will be able to link, for example, on the biggest object, center and center, just like this. Also use the top. You can use the top like this inside the object or the top outside the object or the bottom outside the object, just like this. So you can be outside or inside, or here can be outside or inside as well. And on this area can be the My dolls and in the Midl just here. Depending on the situation, you can adjust let's selected for selective biggest objects Mob Now, if we have multiple object two, for example, I will select to rectangles, I will create a first one, and I will duplicate with this rectangle with Control D, so I press Control D first time, Control D second time and Control D a third times. So now I have these for tangles, and I would like to add in this for a tangle. So it says the four tangles. I will go on the right, adding and distribute and I can put adding to. And if I select, for example, the first selective, the first selected is the first rectangle here. But if I deselect, I select this one, I can align, for example, to this one. I can press shift this one, this one, and this one, and I will use Aline relative to and I will define, for example, the first selective. So the first selective is this one. And I can adjust, for example, to the top or adjust to the bottom depending on what I want to do or just simply in the mid ups. After we'll complete with a distribution, but we will see that just after. If I click on the rectangle tools, I can also put the different rectangle in a vertical way. I can select all the rectangle axes, and then I will go on the right. On the right here in this area, if I define first selected, the first selected will be my first right angle, but I can define what will be the first selected. For example, it can be this one. Then I press shift, shift, and shift here, and I will go on the right, and on the right, I will define first selected. I can aling on the left or I can align on the right like this or on the right on this area or simply in the midals after we complete with a distribution. This is how we can work with alignment on the page or different object. Okay. 40. Master distribution: We're going to see how to work with distribution. So for this, I will create rectangles on this area, and these rectangles, I will duplicate. I will duplicate with Control D first times. Then I will duplicate with Control D second times, and then I will duplicate with Control D four times. We have seen first how to work with alignment. First, if you want to work with the distribution, the distribution, what is this, it is to have the right space between the different object. Concretely, if I select a rectangle just like this and I want to have the right distribution, I have two options. The first option is to run the right and you can just enable the snapping options. And when you enable the snapping option, you can work with, for example, you have alignment here and nod in same pass and same distances. If you are using same distances, you can use the distribution. For example, I can see these rectangles and I can play this rectangle here. And when I define the second one, you can see some information if we have the same space or not. For example, I can define here and I have information about the same distance between the different tangle at these levels, you can see these different lines. This is the first possibility to work with the distribution. I can also go here and you can work with alignment, and at the same time, the distribution will have some information like what we are the same distribution. Now let's see the second option with the distribution panel. First, I will go on the right, and I will deactivate the snapping options. Then we will activate the panel object. We can activate haline and distribute after to activate haline and distribute, we can go around this area. So we have seen the alignment panel. Alignment panel, we can select relative to something. We can use to page, but the best things to do can be to something. If we select all the rectangles, now we have different type of options and we can align, for example, to the biggest object or smallest object here. The object are the same, so I can select the biggest object. And when you go on the alignment, you can select, for example, Midl just like this. Now, if I want the same space between this area, this area and this area, what I need to do I need to use the distribute panel just below. We have different options. Distribute horizontally, distribute horizontally, but this one is spacing between the left edge. This one is spacing between center or spacing between the right edge or even distribute horizontally with horizontally. Depend on the situation. In this situation, it will be the same. So I can, for example, select this one will have the right space between this area, this area and this area. But if, for example, I define this one, it's going to work as well. In some situation, you will have to use this one. But in this type of case, the different possibility will be the same completely. I see what we can do. And here we have the right space between this area, this area, this area, and this area. So now we can work in the other way. Here we have distribute horizontal. We can also distribute vertical. I will keep this example and I will dragging and moving to different rectangles here. So we can also have more element here, just put four element, but you can press Control D, I can create der one and I can press Control D and I can add der one. Here we have more elements. I can select all the element just like this. And after to select all the elements, I will go on this area and we have the adding and distribute panels. I adding and distribute panels, one more time, I can select relative to. You can use relative to page, but here relative to page, you use center, we go, for example, in the center here. And I can activate the distribution. This distribution, we can work vertically as well, distribute vertically with even spacing between top edges, distribute vertically with even spacing between centers or distribute vertically with even spacing between bottom edges or distribute vertically with even vertical gaps. If I see this one, I will have the same space here, here, here, here and here. So this is how we can work. If I was using another one in this type of case, it would work in the same way, but in this type of case, it will impact if you have different size of object. Here my object have the same size. This is why I can use this one. But if the objects have different size, you can maybe use another one. And in this case, as you can see, I can work with the distribution here. In the type of case where for example, I wanted to stay on the left, I can select, for example, this first object to have this reference. I will press shift to select all the different object. Then I will switch relative to the first selected. And if I switch to the first selected, this one will be the first one selected. So this one is the first one selected. Now I can align all to example the left or the right. What I will use, I will use, for example, aligned left. With the base of this object. And if I want to have the right distribution, I will use, for example, distribute vertically with even vertical gaps. I can click on this area, and I will have the same space here, here, here, here, and here. And this is how we can work with the distribution. So you can put a different object at different position. For example, this one, I can play a different object here. You just need to select the first one as a reference. For example, this one can be a reference, and I can select my different object here one more time relative to the first selected, I can use, for example, Aline write and after to select haline write, I will use distribute vertically with even vertical gaps, and I will work like this. 41. Master layers part 1: We're going to see how to work with layers. For this, when we go on the right, we can have the layer panels. So these panels, as I explained at the beginning, we can go in layers and we can define layers and objects. Thanks to that, we can display layer panels on the top right corners. By default, we have the layer number one. If you have different type of things, this will be displayed on the layer number one. You can just stay in one layer, but depending on the situation, can be interesting to work with different layers. First, I will create rectangles. I will activate the snapping option on the top right corners and I will create rectangles on the back roles. We define colors. I will go here and I will define, for example, this type of blue colors. And this will be my first layer. To nim layer, just need to double click and you can wnable layer. This one would be, for example, the sky layers. No, I would like to create something differently on a different layer. So how to do this, you have two options. The first option is to go right click and you can add a layer. So right click on the layers. You can add a layer and you have this small panel where you can rename the layers above the current layers or below the current layers. So here I will change and I will take, for example, Monten. I take Monten and I will click on Add. So after to do this type of work, we seltPenTol with a pen tool, we create something like mountain, we'd snap to this handle page. I will arrive around here and I will create the first Point to second point and different point around this area will snap to the border of the page and we snap to this first point to create area with a pass. Then we will select a color so we define a color like, for example, this type of colors. Maybe this one, it will be pretty better. And I will duplicate this pass object layer. Here, this is the main layer and this one is just like object layer. You can have any type of object layer, it can be rectangle, it can be a pass, it can be anything like this can be inside main layers. I will duplicate with edit duplicate or Control D, and I will select the node tools. I will change the color for this type of rey color and with the node tools, I will dragging and moving to create this type of effect on the back and are we dragging and moving here as well? And are we dragging and moving here also? So now we have two different layers this one and this one. Let's continue. Let's first create different layers and after we'll see how to process. I will click on this area and I will crat oder one, click on plus. After to click on plus, I will crat an oder one. This is a second way to create a new layers and you can directly rename. We will rename for, for example, retape filled. In the fill layers, I will create rectangles and I will snap to this point and snap to this point to crate rectangle with, for example, some green color, this one. Then I will create another rectangle. I will snap to this point until around this area, and I will define second colors. And I will create the last layers. You can also go on the top corners here and you can have the layer panels, and all the type of things that I'm going to show you will be on this area. Yer subject and layers, minimal layers, show at current layers, lock unlocked current layers, and dragging and moving the layer for grad. So we can also use these panels, but we can use the panels on the right in this pretty better. Now we right click, add the layers, and these layers will rename for, for example, crude. After we validate and I will select the circle too. We do a little bit around this color we create the circles, and we'll switch this circle with the white color. We define a color here, and we switch for the white color, and we duplicate the circle with Control D, place first circle here, and Control D to place another one here. I will select the swiss circles, and after to select the Swiss circle we we do a boolean operation with pass union. After to do union, we have only one entity. I would select direct tangle, create a rectangle around this area, and I will select supreme color. And after that, I will select the two object. We have this two object and we can create boanoperation to substrate the rectangle to the union element. And for this we use pass and we will use difference. Thanks to that, I can create this code using this way. So this code, we can place up this area and I will duplicate with Control D one more time to, for example, another one. I will scale a little bit and Control D again, and I will increase a little bit, the size and control D again, and this one I will reduce the size and place here. So this one will be my layers. When I go into layer panels, you can find out four layers. So the sky layers, the mountain layers, the field layers, and the crude layers. And inside these different layers, we can have different elements in this case, where these different paths here, we have rectangle, we have pass here, we name the pass, we name the rectangle, you can do as well. So for things that we can do when we have some layers is, for example, two idle layers. When you go on the right, you can find display. For example, I have the mountain layers. And this area, I can deactivate the display of the mountain just like this. You can also you can also have the possibility so you can remove the view, but you can also do this only for the object. So only for the object layer, you can also do this. You have the possibility to change the transparency with these panels. And here you can just change the opacity. You can put to zero or you can change the transparency. It is convenient, and you have also a blend mode. So blend mode, what is this? It is crcation encrustation effing between the layers below. Concretely, you can select, for example, lighten, screen, and you can have different vendors. Generally, it's more useful when you have image, but in some case, even if you work with this type of format, you can use this one as well. It just come back with normal and you can change the transparency. You can also do this on any type of layer, so you can also adjust the transparency only on the object layers. The other possibility will be to local layer. While it is useful because sometimes you want to a selection adjust and by mistake, you will move something on the background just like this. And sometimes it's not continual. So if you want to lock the layer, for example, on the background to be sure to not move, you can go on this area and you can log the layers. And after to log the layers, as you can see, I can try to move this, and it's not possible. So I can try to move this and I can not do any transformation for the simple reason that these layers is locked. And if I unlock the layers, now I can move these layers or I can adjust at my convenience. This why press useful. Generally, when you have some layer on the backgrounds, you don't want to move the layer, you want to fix the layers, you can activate this one. This is a lot of options. And after that, we can change the position foreground background. Here we are going to see that after. So every time we can come back into layer panels in the layer panels, you can find layer and object. You can display the layer and object panels on the top right corners, and after all these type of options will be summary of what we can do. All these type of options, you can find this on the right when you open the layer and panels. 42. Master layers part 2: We're going to continue with the layers. We have seen how to work with the layers, how we can create layers. We're going to see the position foreground backrooms. So for example, the layers on these areas, it means the layers below will be on the backgrounds, and the layers on the top will be on the foreground. So concretely, you can find here y selection in one step, lower selection one step. So when I go in this area, I have the possibility to change the position and I can change the position on the foreground and on the backroom just like this. So if for example, I go here, I can change the position on the foreground, and if I just scroll below, I can change the position on the backrooms. Here, you can just move in one step or you can move in another step. So the possibility just to dragging and moving the layers. So it means I can go left click and I can drag in and move in the layers on, for example, the top, just like this. You need to be careful because you can also put a layer inside another one. If I move this one inside crudes, I will put the scan layer inside the clude layers. So we need to be careful about that because you can put layers inside another one. Now if I want to be on the top, I will go outside and I will drag in and move in here. So these layers now is on the top. So this is why because it is on the from, I don't see anything below. Now I can move, for example, place the layers maybe here and one step, I can see the crude layers here another step. I can see the field layers, and here, I can see the mountain layers just like that. You can switch from acom. This is exactly when you click on this area. You have also the possibility to move the element for ground background, but you need to be careful because when you work like this, it will only move the object, not the layer. So when you work on this area, it just the selection. It is not really the layer. It is only the selection. So there is a difference between using this one who raise all the layers and using this one to raise only the selection. This is how we can play a different element for the backrooms. If you want to remove a layer, how you can do remove or duplicate. To duplicate the layers, you can go right click and right click, you have different options. Add layers, duplicate layers, digit layers, rename layers, layer two group. You can also raise layers and lower layers, and you have all the different options that I showed you before, like to add the layers or like to the layers. So if I just go on this area and I select, for example, duplicate layers, I can duplicate the layers. So you can duplicate like this. You can also go right click again and I can duplicate again. So here I created two copy of these layers. Diltal layers, you have two options. The first option is to click here, delete selected items, so it can be on your items or items, what is this can be only on element, like, for example, a pass or rectangle, a circular or anything like this. But if you click on this area, you can also delete complete layers. I can delete these complete layers. If I click here, I can delete these complete layers as well. So after to do this type of work, I deleted these two layers. But also when we take a look on the right, we have also some color codes. So you can adjust the color code. I just something visual if you want to work more conveniently. It's not extremely important, it just something visual. So for example, I have the sky colors. I have my sky layers, I can click on this area. And I can say that maybe for the sky, I will define for my color layers, the blue colors, just something visual for you. If I select Montain, I can click on this area and I can define another color. Maybe I can define the brd colors. If I select filled, I will define another color. Maybe for this one, we can define some green color just like this. And if I define clue, I will define color, and maybe this one redefine, for example, red color. I just something for you. But as you can see, the color is displayed not only on the right. You don't have only a rectangle with a color display. It's also on how the text will be displayed. So the text on this area will keep this color, as you can see, here we have the red colors. And here we have also the different small icon just on the front with a color. But in a visual way, it is interesting because you can the first way, conveniently, you can separate the different layer in this way. And here, for example, you have this one. Do you have to create layers on each conception? No. It just depends, but if you have a lot of things or not, you can just work on one layers. Here could work on one layers and only keep a different object pass the rectangle in the layer number one. But when you have a lot of things, it can be convenient. Well, one more ton, you can add a layer, you can click here, you can add layers. You can also, as you can see, just here the layers, and if I want to move my element on the backgrounds, as you can see, it's not possible because I lock this layer or to unlock, I will click here. Something that I can do also is to change the transparency. Let's take a look, for example, on the field layers. I will click here and I have the opacity features. So we can decrease the transparency just like this. So here I have 100%. In some case, even if we work with this format, and we draw, we can adjust the transparency. Sometimes it is convenient. It's more convenient generally when you use the image. But even in this type of case, sometimes it is convenient to change the opacity. But also the blend mode, so we have different type of options here. And we can also adjust the blend mode. Example we have overlay, soft light, hard light, color, screen, lighting, and this is a different options that we can use to adjust the mode, the blend mode. As I explained before, what is this? It is like transparency effect, like incrustation effect between the layers that you use and the layers below. When I go on this area, one more time, you can display the panels with layer and object and you can find the different options. Add layers, rename layers, exactly like here, add layers, rename layers. Show layers, lock layers, exactly like here, when you click on layers, you can show layers, and you can add layers as well. So all this type of thing, you can do this with a layer and obj panel. So I think it's not very convenient to use here because you can have all this option here. Switch to layer above, switch to layer, be below, move selection to layer above, move selection to layer below. One more time, it's not extremely interesting for the simple reason that we can do all this type of work with this layer and object panel. So for example, you have the sky here and I can move this element on the it's not going to work because yes, I'm going to select the sky here all the layers. Yeah, I was not using other layers, and you can move like this. Why it's not working because it's layers and inside among ten layers. So I need to put outside again. I'm going to put outside again. Yes, like this. And sometimes it's not convenient, so we need to put outside, like this. Yes, now it is outside, pretty better. If you have some trouble here, put the layers on the top, so you can put the layers on the top just like this. And when you put the layer on the top, you will be pretty sure it is totally outside. And now I'm going to reorganize. I will sect for example, the mountains and I will put here, and I will see the sky layer we put here. And from this panel, you can put for room, for example, the foom here and I can put on the backgrounds as well. So it is how we can work with the layers. 43. Add images: A short when I click on this area, I can search in this case, I will take ex and I will need to be careful same moves if we shift, we can keep the proportion shift from the center exactly like an so after it works exactly like an obj. For example, and I can put. I can increase the size of we can scale again image. After that, something that we can do also is a snapping option. Can 15, 30, 45, 60, 75, 90 degrees. When I go on this area, I can apply here. We can go around here and we can go around here as well. Now if I just come back, we can adjust the transformation point, so I can click on the transformation point with the second left click and we can move the transformation point outside. If the transformation point is located here and I create rotation, I will rotate on this transformation point. We can one more time snap the transformation point. So for this, we can use Other point object rotation center, and I can snap, for example, the rotation point on the bottom left corner of the image. And now if I create rotation, I can move around this corner. So this is the first way to, for example, add an image. We're going to see a second example, I will remove this one and I will add another one. For this, I will go in the top left corner, we go on file here, and I will impart another image. I will define import. We will try another one, what image I will use. I will use, for example, this image. After that, I will put the image here and we will scale the image around this area just like this. Then if I want to scale the image one more time, I can scale the image. I want to place the image in the center, I can play the image in the center. Something interesting is we can work also with a blend mode when we have image. So let's take a look. We'll add another image I import. So I will add another image. I will add also maybe I have an image with Ocean. With this one will integrate the image. And I will press Control to keep the ratio. We will play this image hoops. I forgot to press control. We will play this image in the background so I can place this one on the backgrounds. We can put this on the backgrounds and I will go on file. I will select Import. And I will try another 11 more time, like for example, this one, and I will scale the image as well. Something interesting, you can change the blend mode. For example, I have this image, and when I go on the right, you can click here to deactivate the view. When you go here, you can change the transparency. As you can see in this case, it can be pretty interesting to butt some effect. You can also use one of the blend mode that we have here to adjust.F example, overlay can be interesting and we can use a blend mode like this. It is same with this one, so I can click on this one. And if I go on the right, I can click here and if I want to adjust, I can select, for example, overlay or something like, for example, color dodge, you have multiple type of blend mode that you can use on your image. And thanks to that, we can do something like this. Transparency and blend mode, I can show you again, we can delete this one. I will increase a little bit more this one, lay more in the center. And this one I will snap to this area until around here. And I can change the blend mode one more time, so I will go on the right options. And one more time can create a blend effect with opacity, and I can use something different like ten or one more time overlay, and we can create multiple types of options. I can also activate reduce the transparency as well just like this. This is how to add image. 44. Vectorize images: We're going to see how to vectorize image. For this, something that we can do, first, it is to add an image. We'll go on file here, and we will import image. After to do this work, I will import a first image example. And the first image example will be this one with a flower. But we integrate this image and replace here and I will scale with control. How to vectorize image. When you go on the top corners here, you can find Tres bitmap. It means you have image in pixels, and you can use this one. Interesting in different ways just on a simple image like this, but also when you have an image like a drawing and you want to vectorize this to create something like a vector file, you can use this one. Let's use Tress bitmap. Here, you have a new panels opening on the right. You can find single scan multicolor pixel. Need to understand that single scan multicolor will use the most. You have a pixel art but pixel art can be pretty low. Basic single scar just have here, you can activate the preview, and you can change here. The update the preview just like this. You need to select the image or it's not going to work properly. Now you can see. Kids brightness cut off. You have the edge detections, lar contization, autotrace or center line. But you have something in black and white, just the edge I can click on edge detections. We can adjust little bit of sue hole, for example, I can reduce here, or also some speaker values, musorneer adjustment, optimization, user assistance stress, and if I just click on apply. A new file is created. I go on my git, I have the image, so this one is a image, and this one is a new file created using image trace. We have a pass. Created, you can see it is perfect vector format because we don't have any pixels. So this one is a vector format. As you can see, I can create a base just using this one. If I just delete here and recuperate my image, let's try another one. I read slc one more time TraceVman. But I would like to keep the color. Keep the color, you can use some auto trace or center line tracing auto trace. To are very close. You define a number of iteration, it means the number of separation between the different colors. Error here. One more time can adjust little bit these three different options. You need to try to. There is not only one true. You need to try and when I click on apply just like this, a new file has been created and when I go on this area, we have the original image and we have the new one. Since this case is not very very nice, but I'm going to show you after in another process, it can be interesting. Welcome back to the Trace Bitmap. You can also work with multicolors. With multicolor, you have different type of steps. And here, one more time, we have auto trace slower. But if you just select something like color here, you can use one more time a number of separation. So for example, I can define maybe ten separation, so it means ten scans. You can work with smooth you are also stack remove backroom but in this case, not what I want to do. If I just click on upline. You can see now we have two fine, this one is original image, and this one is with auto trace. And here we defined ten type of colors. In the layer and object, you will have a group creative and all the paths have been created. And here we have ten elements because we choose ten scan. For example, if I double click inside, I can edit and you can see all the different and check point with all the different pass created. For example, if I select something like this one and I press delete, I can delete this pass or this one, I can delete this pass. After you can adjust if you need. Let's just press delete. I'm going to select all the element here, press delete in the tras bit map here this color. When you slip color, you can also use remove backgrouns. But if you apply remove backgrouns just like this, as you can see if I move, I'm just going to obtain this vendor as well. So this is the type of thing that we can do. Let's select a second example where it can be interesting I will go on file, I will select Import, and I have another image that we can use. This other image will be the image with an illustration, this one. So I will import this image. I will scale little bit, and this image is a pixel image. So concretely, if I zoom, you can see all this is in pixels. So if I zoom, the quality is not very good. And I can use Auto trace, if I want to convert to vector format with a new file, I can use Trace Bitmap. Here we can come back to single scan. One more time you can work with J H detection, we'll obtain this random. Maybe it's not the base. We can select, in my opinion, this type of auto trace. We will use maybe let's try with ten or maybe I will reduce with only six can activate a little bit more optimization. I will click on pline and now if I dragging and moving, we can see the new file, and as you can see, it works perfectly. So it means if we zoom, we have a new file in vector format in the layer objects. This one is a new file with a vector format hoops. I have groups I'm going to remove. So this one is the vector format. We have a pass, and as you can see, we have created a new file just like this, a new layers. If you double click, you have also access to the sharp point. So it means if you want to adjust, now you can. So you can convert the image in pixels like something with a drawing. You can convert in vector File, and after to convert in vector file, you can adjust the sharp point. But because it, I have also the possibility if I go in the fill and strop panels we go in the stock paint. And as you can see, we can change the color of the stroke. I can go on the stroke style and I can also increase the stroke style. So as you can see, it can be extremely useful. Now I increase little bit of stroke style, and I will obtain this wonder and we have a perfect vertor format, and it works perfectly. And now I could work, for example, with this type of pass. If I try another one, we can go on the fill and stroke, stress bit map. So this one is auto tres, it works perfectly. In the multicolor, we could we brightness, color, gray, Walmart, we have this autotrace facilic for example, colors. I'm going to remove this one. I will just click on apply. I will select layers and object one more time this time, I have a group, only two element, and as you can see, we can work like this. Maybe my first example was a little bit better because here we have struck with different tenso point, it's a little bit different because instead we have only the path here, we have a sickness on this strop, so it's a little bit different. But the important aim is to understand the principle of work, and this is how we can work. 45. Create masks part 1: We're going to see how to work with mask. And for this to create a mask subjects that we are going to do, it is first to import an image. So for this, I will go on file. I will select Import, and I will import directly image that I have here. So what image will use will use the rod image, so it means this one. And I will double click, I will insert my image with Zoom little bit, and I will scale the image just on this area. So after to do this type of work, I will play the image here, I will scale a little bit, and I will create shapes. We will create a rectangle just on the front, and I will create the rectangles here, and I will place rectangles on this area. So now with a rectangle, you can define the areas that you want to have. The aim is to put a part of the image inside the rectangle. So you can also click on the rectangles. You can go on the option here, transparency and you can, for example, reduce the transparency and place exactly the rectangle in the area that you want to define that you want to choose. And you can just recuperate 100% of transparency just here. After to do this type of work, you can select the two elements. So you select the rectangles and you select the image with shift or a frame of selection. And when you go on the top here, you can find clip and mask. Um, if you use the two is going to work, you have not big difference. If for example, you use clip here, you clip and you click on set clip or Control shortcut. When you go on this area, as you can see, part of the image will be here. Now, you go on this area, and as you can see, you can find a small symbol. The symbols change because we have created a cut using a shape. And now, as you can see, we have this element, and I can resize, I will keep the proportion of the image. And this is how you can process. You can also double click, and now you have something like a group. So concretely when you go here, you can select the image. And when you go right click, you have different type of options and you have crop image to click, for example, and if you just click on this one, you can just do something like this. But yeah, in this type of case, it's not extremely useful. So this is how you can process. I'm going to undo and come back just before the way that we have this. If, for example, you sealing the entity and you go on clip and you select set inverse clip. It's going to work in the same way just like this. It depends just about the position if you are or groom backgrounds. But most of the time, the best you can also release a clip and release a clip if you want to, for example, come back. So if I use object, I will define clip, set clip. And if I want to release result to go in the history panels, I can just click here, and I will define one more time pass, and I will define clip release clip. And in this case, you can reperate this one. So this is how we can process. Now what we're going to do, we are going to delete this rectangle, delete this one, and I will show you with another example. We'll go and fight here, and I will impart another image. So what image I will impart, I will impart this part image. So I can double click and the image will appear on these directions. And the first thing that I'm going to do is to radiate the image here, and I will place the image around this area. And we like to crow but this time we work with circles. Selling the circle tools, and I will create the circles around this area, and one more time, I can do the same type of work. So I can click on the circles. I can go on the options, and I can decrease the transparency first a little bit, and I can place my circle exactly in the way that I want to crop. So maybe we can scale scale a little bit here and place the circle around this area. And I would like to drop this area. So how to do this, I will come back to the pass. I can recuperate the transparency to 100%, and then we can select. And after to select, I will go on the pass features, and on the pass features, what we can do, we can just I will go on the object features, and we can use clip set clip. But if you use mask, you can use set mask. And as you can see, the set mask is not extremely interesting because we obtain this type of render. It is like to mask this area, and generally, we don't really use this too much. And this is why I don't really show you because you can use object, you can slc mask, set invert mask, and you can obtain this render. You can also go on object, mask and release a mask. But definitely, we don't use really that. So if you want to create a mass, the most important thing is the first way. So you have your circle. You define, for example, your shape, it works with any shapes. Then you can select the two entity, and I will go on pass, and I will go on object, and I will define clip set clip. And as you can see now, we can do something like this. So as you can see, it's convenient if you have any image that you want to crop. You can use this way. You can use the clip mask and it's going to be perfect. Then I can scale. The image will be scale as well. You need to press control if you want to keep the proportion, and as you can see, it's pretty good, the image will stay perfectly inside. And if you double click, you can just create some rotation, for example, like this on your image. You can do any step. I never you want to go back, you just need to and set the mask and how you can do this, you can go on object, clip, and you have released slip. And I will define really clip here, and as you can see, I can come back with now the circle and I can come back with my original image. So this is how we can craft mask on image. I will click here, I will delete and click here, and I will delete as well. 46. Create masks part 2: We are going to continue with a mask. So for this, something that we're going to do, it is to import image. We have seen how we can create a mask, with image, you have the possibility to do the same type of thing with text, first I will find here, and I will import image. What image I will import, I will import first the image with Ocean, and I will double click here. I will integrate the image, and then we will scale the image. I will increase the image here, and I will place the image just on this area. And after I will increase the size. So after to do this type of work, I will click on the text tools. And with text tools, I will click on this area and we will define some text. I will go ef click and I will tap something. We will tap just ****. And as you can see, I have this font family. So what I can do, I can select all the letters. And we'll change the font family because we want to crop the image inside the text. I think it's pretty better if you take a font family with big letters, and something interesting that we can use is, for example, Franklin got heavy. You can use this one. I think it will be pretty good to put the image inside the text. I will go left click here, and now what I will do, I will scale. And you can change the color, apply any color on the text. It's going to work as well. But let's just come back with the red color, this one. And I would like to put, for example, the sky inside the letter. So I will place my text just here. I will repeat the same process. You can just go in this area. You can reduce the transparency on the text, and you can place exactly where you want first. And after hoops, I put the transparency on all the layers is not what I want to do. I just want only on the text. So thanks to that, you can see exactly what you are going to take. And if I just click here, I will recreate the transparency just like that. So now what I will do, I will select the two entity with shift or frame of selection, and we'll go on and we'll go on object, clip, set clip, and we can put the image inside as you can see. If you select the invert, we will go on this Object will say clip, set inverse clip, and as you can see, it's not going to be interesting in this type of case. So we can just clip like that. You have also the possibility to go on object, clip, set clip. Oops, I think it's not going to work. I would say the two object, object, clip set clip. So I will obtain this render. Now what I can do, I can go on object, clip, and release clip. Object, clip release. So let's see a second example. I will remove all this element and we will repeat the same process with a second example. First, I will add image one more time, we will click on file, we will impart another image. I will go on this area with scroll below, and here you have this image with tropical. I will integrate the image first. Oops. This image is a little bit more bigger. We scale the image, and one more time will play the image here. I will add some text, so we'll click on the text tools, and we will go left click here and we can tape I will tape, I will tape content. So I will tape content this time. And I will use the selection tool. I will prick little bit of proportion, and I would like to define the ocean inside. So I will play this one here. I can one more time, click and change little bits of transparency to see exactly what area I want to take. So maybe this one. And after that, if I'm satisfied, I will recuperate the opacity at 100%. So after to do this work, we can select two entity, and we can go on object. If you select mask, it's not going to be very interesting. You can set the mask and you will obtain this render. I'm going to show you again, object, mask, set invert mask. And as you can see, we have only this. So I'm going to show you again, object mask set invert mask, and I will obtain that. And if, for example, you go on mask, it is same. You can select object, mask, set mask, and you can select object, mask release mask, but we don't use this too much. At the opposite process, you can click here. You can go on Object, clip Setlip and you can obtain this render. If I just come back, I will select all. You can go on object, clip, set Invert clip, and it's going to work as well if you set invert clip, as you can see. But something that you will use most of the time something that you will use, most of the time, you select all just like this. And most of the time you will just clip and you will set the clip. It is the best way to work. And when you click on set clip, you can put this image inside the text. Then if you want to scale, you can scale. So I can scale. I can keep the proportion with control, for example. And when I go here, I can, for example, scale also on this area, and I will break the proportion of the image inside as well. So it is also something important to know. As you can see, it's a great way because if you want to create this type of effect to put some image inside text, to have something like patterns or yes, texture inside the letters, you can work like this. If I want just to repreate my image, I will be able to go on object, clip, release clip. I can repret my image. But here, as I explained, we have scaled the image. So we have break the proportion of the image. It is also important to understand. So now what I will do, I will select the two element. I will press delete, and this is the process if you want to write a mass, so the am you can select a specific area of image using a shape, or you can also put image inside text. 47. Add pages part 1: We're going to see how to work with pages. For this by default, when we create a new document, we have a page and this page we can change the display. When we go on this area, we can find the page tools, create and edit document pages. We can work with only one pages and we can create more pages. First thing to do, if I want to adjust with a new page, I can click on these tools. And after to click on these tools, we can define just the page that we want here. So on this area, this is the size of the page that I have by default. Concretely, fine document properties. And in the document properties, I created a new document with 1,600 pixels by 1,200 pixels. So this is my original size of this page. I can change the original size of the page after. Now if I come back here, I want to have exactly the same size of the page, I can just click here and you have a small plus icon on the left and when I click on this area, I can create a new page with exactly the same size. When I click here, I can create another one with exactly the same size and I can continue just like this. We have also the possibility to change the size. Concretely, if for example, I click outside, and I come back with a page two, the last page, we can change the size. And for this, you can replace this size, but one of the predefined size that we have, I want to switch for a four page, I can switch for a four page. I want to switch for, for example, descop, I can switch for descop. If I want to switch for, for example, letters, I can switch for letters. If now I click on plus, I will create also a new page with letter and if I click on Plus again, another one with letters. This is the first things to understand when you want to create a page. After that on this pair, there is also different possibility on this area, you can create some offset. Here you have margins. If for example, on the top, I replace, I can define 20 on the top. On the left, I can define 20 on the right 20 and here 20. We have the possibility to directly apply the margins on this area. I come back to my selection too, you can see the margin here and we can work with multiple edges. It is useful, we can create something like for example, a card and we can have to write the front and the back and we don't need to create multiple documents. We can stay inside the same document. So after to do this work, you can also when you have a page, you can select this page and you can drag in and moving the page on a different position. If you want to align the page with aliment distribution, it is not possible to use directly the alignment panels. But you can align the page just with different guides. And for this, you can go on the right and on the right, you can just activate things like the page borders or we have also the page margins enable the snapping options to be able to stay in the same alignment. We can also add a bleed. How to add a bleed, we can go on the top, and when we go here, we have the possibility to work one more time with the margins can reduce. You can also apply different values that can apply maybe 20 here. Maybe on this area we tap 20 on this area, we tap ten, and then I have the page pled. The page bled, what is this? It is the area of work. Concretely, we can define a specific area of work. And I will define something like maybe 100 pixels. And if I define 100 pixels, I will have a bleed area. Concretely, you can create object and the object can go outside of the page, but you can let only in the specific area and when you export work, you can export the work with the bleed. I want to come back, and just click on this area, I will define a page Mori for example, zero, and I will define order value here like zero, we define zero, I will define zero here, and I will define zero here, and I will come back with a selection tools. With a selection tool, you cannot move a page. If you want to move a page, you need to select the page tools. Can see also the number of page that you have here. You can switch for the previous page on this area and you can adjust the size. So if, for example, I move here, this is a page number four, six, and I can adjust, for example, a four. And to remove a page, we can click on We Tilt page here, move object with page. It is interesting because inside, we put different object, and I will explain this one after. If you want to remove a page, you can just click on this area and you can remove a page or I can click here and I can remove a page as well. The second option to create a page is just to create with left click, just frame to create a page. For example, here, I'm going to use the page tool and inside to click on Plus with, for example, one of the predefined models, you can just switch for customs. And when you switch for Custom, you just need to go left click and you can generate a page. Or after I can go left click again, generate another page. I can define the size of this page just on the left after. So it means now I can define a size. Let's tap, for example, two Tsan and on this area, we type, for example, 1,600, 1,600, and I can just change like this. Here we have a first page with this size, and there's another page with this size also. And if after I want to add a page margin, I can do from this area. So now we have this page. So this is the second possibility to write a page. If you want to align your page, you can move the pad, but as I explained, you can stay, for example, on the same alignment, and for this, you can just drag in and moving the page, activate the snapping options, and I can drag in and move the pad just like this. This one, even if it's smaller, I can stay in the same alignment, but you can align the peg just using the different snapping options at your convenience. This is how we can add page. So we are going to do is to click here after I'm going to show you this content. We'll remove this one, remove this one. We will remove this one, remove this one, and remove this one. I can just come back with my original page 1,000 601,200. 48. Add pages part 2: We're going to continue with the pages. We have seen how to craft edges. So here we have a page. This page, first, if I want to edit the size as I explained before, you can go in file, you define the document properties, and in the document properties, you can have access to your edge options, and you can change the white, you can change the height. You can change also the orientation, portrait landscape. You can also have more options if you need, and you can change the unit. Here it is how to displace the size of the page. Now if you want to create a new page, as I explained before, you select the page tools and inside the same document, you can have multiple page. Here we have 1,000 by 1,200 pixel. Around the same size, where are in customs, I just click on Plus and I can create a new page. If I want to move the page, I just need to dragging and moving like this. Let's crater one, for example, plus and I can dragging and moving like this, my page also. Let's continue. I will click on Plus, I will add another one, and I will move the page here. So second options can be to create a frame of selection. So you can switch here, Customs and you can just write a frame of selection, a frame to create a page. And in this case, you can just write a page with the size that you want. And if I want to define the page, you can switch or one of the predefined models or you can come back to Customs and you can just switch with a size. It is also another possibility. Remove a page, you can just click here, you can remove and you can remove a page just like this. Now, if you want to add content, it's going to work exactly as you want, but you can also complete with the layers. For example, these layers, I can say I will work on the page number one, and I will create a new one and I will create page number two. I will create a new one, and I will tap page number three, and I will create a new one for page number four.Thks to that, I can create a structure for the layers and object. Select the page number one, I will define the rectangle tools just like this. And with the rectangle tools, I will create a prime of selection here, and I will change for another colors. For example, I will select the blue colors. And I will add also some texts. I will select the text tools. I will go inside, and I will tape content number one. So I will tape content number one. I will select the selection tools. I need to adjust with a fill and stroke. And we will adjust with you have a black color. Maybe I will define the white color just like this. I will put this in the center, and I will change a little bit of color of this element like this one. And something that I will do it just to repeat. I will click on these two elements and I will duplicate with Control D, and I will raging and moving inside the page number two, and I will move the content on the page number two just like this. I just need to double click and we will replace by content number two, and I will change the color. Here the aim is to see how you can structure. I will select, for example, these two layers. Not these two layers, these two object layers, object and text layers. I will duplicate with Control D. Then you need to drag and move inside the page. You just dragging and moving here, for example, on this area, it's not going to move on the layers. I just going to move on your page here, but you are still in the same layers. So I need to dragging and moving here inside page number three. And we will change that for content number three, we select the red background. We define another one like for example, the green rea, and that's it. I will select one more time, these two layers. I will duplicate with Control D, and after that, I will drag and moving my content here, but not only here in the page as well, and I will dragging and moving inside to page number four. You need to be really inside, so I need to little bit on the right to be inside the layers. And this one is page number four. The content here, I can switch for content number four, just like this, and I will change the color, I will define this purple color. But this is a structure that you can do if you want to have something clean in your construction tree, you can create one main layer for each page. And after you can focus inside, you can also create sub layer inside you need. You know, thanks to that, we have the page number one, we can, for example, deactivate the view of the content of all the elements that we have inside the page. And as you can see, it can be pretty convenient if you work like this, for example, a main layers or a main page. Now, something important to know is when you see the textbook, just here, you have on this area move object with page. So concretely if you don't have this activity, and I'm going to page number four. I decide to move here. As you can see, I only move the page, but the content is not going to move. So for example, I will have after to select also the content and to move also the content. So if you do something like this, it's not very convenient. So second option, the second option, what is this? It is this word move object with page. So I can activate move object with page, and in this case, I can move the content inside the object. If, for example, I go here, I can also change the display on this area, and as you can see, the content will be moved in the same way. Don't forget that if now you create a new page. So for example, I create a new page, the page will appear here and you won't have the same content, or the page will appears on this area. I can go here just after if I create a new page, the page will appear on these directions. Let's just come back to this page. I have still this one activated, move object with pages. I will define this one here. I will define this one here, and I will define this one here. As you can see, this is why it is interesting. You can stay in the same document. And as I explained, when you export your work, you can define what you want to export. So if after you export, you have the possibility to export only one page, for example. 49. Add effects part 1: We're going to see how to work with pass effect. And for this something that we are going to do, first, it is to select the paint tools, and we will create a pass. I will go left click here, left click here to create a curves and I will press Enter to validate these squares. Then we'll go on the right. I will go on the fill and stroke options, and on the stroke option, we will deactivate the colors and we'll apply a stroke style. Here, I can increase with some value like the white and I can use a stroke paint and we'll activate the colors. So now I will play this element around here. We will use the not tools, and I can adjust, for example, little bit my element. So here, as you can see, we have a pass, we can adjust the node. And if you want to create a Pasific, you can open a panel. What panels you can open, you can go and pass here. And when you go and pass, you have the possibility to open the pass effect panels. So here we can open the pass effect panels. I will just click on this area, pass effect. And now we can open a panel, the panels will be displayed on the right here. And when you select object, you can then have access to the different pacific when you click on this area. If you know all the pacific, you can just tape the pacific that you want here. Let's take first example. When you have something like this, you have edit, distort, generate, convert. And something that I will use first, it is, for example, a taper stroke. So I will click on Taper stroke, and why it is useful in this type of case because you can change the end and the start, you have first to stroke wide, so this is a stroke wide that we define. And after to define the stroke wide, we can also select start offset. So we can define where we are going to start here to change the wide. You have also the end offset. You can also adjust on this area. Then we can start smoothing and we can adjust this one and the end smoothing as well as you can see. Need to be careful on your wheel at the end of something little bit strange. Have also the drain type. So for example, we can change something like this, start direction, clamp left or right. So in this case, you can just select center, and this is the type of things that we can do. So now if you select these tools, you have your entar point, but you don't have only your ent point because you have a pacific, also this element allow you to adjust your pacific. So this handle is to adjust your pacific like this one is also to adjust the pacific like this. And if I just click here, as you can see, I adjust my pass using this one. You can also mix multiple pacific at the same time. So how to mix multiple pacific, you just need to search oder one. Let's select an oder one, for example, I will use something like bend, and if I use something like bend, I can define a wise and I can bend my pass and I will use a value. After to do something like this, you can have different options. And for example, for this element, I have two pacific. You come back to fit, you won't see anything special, but the pacific are still present on my element. So we have two pacific on this area. And you can create more pacific for only one object selected. If you want to remove a pacific first, you can also change the position of a pacific just here, so it will adjust eventually the first one or the second one. And if we need to deactivate the view of a Pacific, we can click here. And if I want to remove a Pacific, you just need to click on this area. Let's remove this one as well. Let's try another pacific. I will click here, and I will define, for example, we have Power stroke, simplifying taper stroke. We can use something like Power stroke. It's a little bit in the same way, but we have some difference. For example, you can define a wide multipliers like this. We can apply a smoothness value also, and you have the start cap. So the start cap can be adjusted on this area and the end cap can be adjusted as well. So you can change what you want to have at the beginning at the end. If I want to use zero wide, I can use zero wide, and you can also use a meters limit. And that's it. So if I do something like this, I can go outside if I select these tools. One more time you have the tools, you will find something to adjust the sickness, and you will find something to adjust, for example, here, or you can also dragging and moving on this areas like that. It is another type of pacific that we can crack. After I will show you on the different shapes like, for example, a rectangle. So this one I'm going to remove. If I just click on this area, you can also crat some band we have seen also use something like node. But in this type of case is not going to be very interesting. You can also convert something on aches, you can use root and we can convert the pass in multiple small curves like this. We have a randomness value, so we can adjust random value just here. I can change, I can put something like maybe 22 dits. We also value, I can increase with a value of ten, depending on the value that I change, it will maybe impact the length of my element. But after I will show you that you can apply this also on something different like rectangles. If I just continue, we'll be able to use also something like tiling and rotate copies. So these two will be very interesting. We also the possibility to create interpolate point or show the handle or to create a Spiro spleen. If I create a Spiro spin here, I can convert to spit here, but I just don't have any specific parameter. If I adjust, I will keep my spleen adjustment here. So I can turn this automatically the original paths have been converted thanks to the pass effect to the SpO spleen. And the spear spleen, what is this, where the perfect curves just like that. Even if you want to add point or anything like this, it's not possible after. So we can only create a spire of spin just like this. So after if I just come back, I adjusted this point. I will put this one on these directions. And it works for any type of element. So after we expand with the rectangles. If I just come back here, I will define maybe let's try another one. You can switch with a perspective and you can adjust the perspective on an object. You will have access to a type envelope deformation or perspective here. You can use also some mirror movement horizontally just like this, or we can switch for mirror movement in vertical. And if I'm moving this point, the point will move at the same time. I have also overflow perspective, and if I'm dragging and moving this point or dragging and moving this point, we can check the sue at the same time, but if you check the swell at the same time, nothing special will happen. I think it's pretty better to adjust each point or to only have axis to only one point. You can change the perspective. Here, this is a different point so you can adjust the different point with a coordinate X and Y axis. But it's more simple if you're dragging and moving each point on each corner and on each side just like this. Let's just remove this one and remove the pass as well. A 50. Add effects part 2: We're going to continue with the Pacific. We have seen how to create a pass and how we can start with the Pacific. Oh, something that we are going to do it is to click on pass, and one more time, I will open the panel so you can find the panel pacific here. Automatically, it will be displayed on the top right corner and we can adjust a pass or we can adjust an object. I'll select the rectangle tools. I will create a rectangle like this, and we will adjust with a filling stroke value. So first, I will go in the stroke paint, and I will deactivate the stroke, and I will apply fill value, and I will activate the fill options. I will just adjust the color. I will define some red color just like this, and I read zoom a little. So first type of pacific can be interesting on this rectangle. So if I just go here see the snapping option, if I just come back to the Pacific. So you can use, for example, the corners. When you use corners here, you can activate some radius and you have more options. So if I increase the radius, I will define maybe a value of 60, you can switch for fillet, invert fillet, champer, invert jumper. And each time you can define a jumper side, steps with five, six or more, and it will impact directly here as you can see. Now we have the unit, so we work in pixel. If you double click here, you can also adjust your pacific with, for example, these angles here, and we can adjust with this one as well. And you can dragging and moving this point and make something a little bit more specific using this one. We still have the chamfer type. We can come back at any moment with some basic fillet and we can adjust also the fillet like this. So this is one of the first type of pacific that we can use. If you remove the Pacific, you will recuperate basic rounded corners like this, and I can recuperate my basic rounded corner here. If I just continue, we can also define one more times in the past effect. You can use something like aches one more time, and we can create something like this. You have a lot of type of option. If you want to smooth on the top, if you want to smooth on the bottom, can also work with a wide. Here you have randomness values. If I want to decrease, I can decrease. You have also some growth, we can work with different values. So you have a lot of type of option here. If I just continue, as I explained before, you can also use something here like the perspective, and we can find perspective envelope or lattice deformation. You can also use lattice deformations, and here you have some option with sit grid. The problem here, you need to double click. And when you double click, you can enter inside the lattice, and you can deform your object with a grid just like this. Here I activated movement horizontal, so it means if I move in here, as you can see the er side is going to move. But if I just deactivate this one, it will work only on one direction. It's definitely interesting because we can make something very specific. You can also work horizontally or use only perimeters. I I come back to horizontal, I will adjust a little bit more here, adjust maybe these handles on these directions, and if I'm just satisfied, I can create something like this. It can be really great to deform object using late deformations. I will remove this one and we will create a rectangle. I will create a rectangles. Here, this rectangle, I would like to create patterns and to repeat this rectangle using patterns. So to create a patterns, outside to duplicate the rectangle multiple time, we can make something more simple. And to make something more simple, we can use a pacific. I will go here, you can select directly tiling. And when you click on tiling, you can define the number of rows. For example, I will define six rows and here is the number of columns and maybe eight columns. After we can define a gap, the gap where is the space between the element, and we can craft a pattern. Maybe I will decrease for six columns. And the rows maybe eight. Then we will increase a little bit more gap. Let's select 40 and on the Yaxs I will apply also maybe 40 also just like that. As you can see, you can create patterns here. You can then create to offset. We can to offset on these directions. On the rows or you can create offset of the columns. On the gap, you can also adjust with something randomly. On something randomly vertically or not or you can come back like this. Even the possibility to put a scale value. So you can have different type of sites for your element, and you can change to scale value depending on where you want to start. You can also apply some rotate value, like or the value, and you can apply here. So you can definitely make a lot of things with these tools, as you can see. And you can create a pattern like this on the back. You start with a base. You also the mirroring mode and you can also one more time, you have different type of options that you can use. For example, I apply some scale values, some rotation. Here, as you can see, you can change the type of mirroring and it will impact if you want to be on a specific direction or not. So you have multiple coordinate directions that you can use to make something perfectly random. And another one I can show you, I will remove this one, another one, I will write, for example, a circle. So we'll create a circle here, and this circle I will scale little bit on this direction, scale on these directions, and we activate anoer color. I will put my element in the center. Or this I will activate the snapping options and place in the center of my document. I would like to repeat in a circular way. So for this, we can use also a pass effect. I will go on the right, and I will click here, and I will define a pass effect. So this time, I will use copies, rotate copies. When I click on rotate copies, as you can see, you can repeat in a circular way. You have the method, pus pass, Kaleidoscope and normal. I'm using normal, I just define the number of copies that I want, just like this and you have distributed. Here is a starting angle so you can start also with angle, you can use some random angles. So for example, if I come back the random angles to zero, I can start like this. And here you have the starting angles. The problem is, if I don't put any rotation angles, I'm not going to repeat anything. So if I define maybe ten, I will repeat in this way. If I define 90, I will repeat in this way. If I define 40, I will repeat in this way. You have different type of options that you can use. I will define maybe CS is 14 and we can define a rotation angles one more time. If I define 20, I will obtain this. But if I define 180 degrees, I will obtain this one, just the number of copies that it will impact my element. And here we can define a number of copy. For example, I can do something maybe more like this. I have also some gap value that I can adjust. Let's try four just like this. And I can define a space because I was using a gap value. But the gap value can be increased. So if I take 12, I will turn this render. Now I can just take my object outside, and as you can see, I can scale my object as well. So if I want to remove the Pacific, I will click here and I can remove the object as well. This is how we can create the Pacific. 51. Add filters part 1: We're going to see how to add filters. And for this to add filters, you can go on this area. And you have different categories of filters that you can use, for example, BRL filters, be filters, color filters, distort filter, fill and transparency, and more. The aim is not to see all these filters. The aim is to show you the principle of work because you can edit different filters with the panels. First thing that we're going to do is to create a rectangle we select the rectangle tools, and we will create rectangles on this area can define any color like for example, the red color. Well, the first way to add filters is just to only click on one of the category like for example, you go on Beals, and you want to create one of these effect, I'm going to use, for example, Mad Beals, and I will just click here and I can just add my transformation on this. I can just apply my beavers, as you can see. Now I will go and edit and I will undo and I will show you another one. I will go on filters. I will take maybe materials and I will use, for example, enamels jewelry. And thanks to that, I can create this type of filters. So the first possibility to add filters is this one. So you have different type of options. I will select another one. I will select this one. I will define mat ridge and that's it. I can create another filters. Let's try another one. I will selict for example, scatters, and I will use this one. As you can see, you can apply filters and you have multiple types of options. Now you need to understand after that that when you go on filters here, you have two option filter editors and filter galleries. What is the difference, the difference is a filter gallery, you will have a summary of all the available filters that you can use in different categories with option to have a preview. And in the filter editor, you can edit more in detail the filters. So for example, I can take on filter galleries just here, and automatically panels will appear on the top right corner. The filter gallery will be applied here. Find all the filter with all the categories on this area, but you can also click on bevels. You can also click on Blue. You can also click on bumps or anything like this, just like that. No after to do this type of work, I will select one of the categories. Let's come back to bevels. So all the categorize will appear here. But as you can see, you have a preview. So this is why it is interesting because you have a preview. So if I select bevels, I want to have something like, for example, deep colored plastic, I can have the preview here, Duglas I can have the preview. Let's, for example, select this one, Duglas. And to apply the filter, you just need to double click. And when you double click, you can apply the filters as you can see. If I want another categorized, for example, let's select another one wigs, you have different option, I will selicn Mmbran double click, and you can apply the filters like this. As you can see, it's convenient because here in this area, you have different type of prejum. They have also some texture and I can double click on organics just like that. If I click here wrote papers, if for example, I apply a beaver with this one and I apply a beaver like something like bloom. You can have multiple effect at the same time on the same element. And I can continue this one. So it means on the same object I created, I have four different filters. And if you're going to hear an object, the problem is you are not going to see these filters, and this is why you have the possibility to go filters and to have access to nodwn options filters editor. When you click on filters Editor, when you go here, you will have the possibility to edit the last filters that you can use. And on this area, you can deactivate the filters, and here you can find five holes. But I put also filters met Now if I remove, I will remove all the filters here. This is important to understand. So here you can apply any filters, and on this area, you will be able to crack also a new filters and to put one of these inside. But we'll see that more in details after. So first, I will remove this one. And you can apply this on any type of object. For example, I will create a circle just below. So I click on the circle tools. I will place my circle here. I will define the color, like, for example, the blue colors, and it is say I can have access to the categorize You have also these options, and this small option will allow you to adjust the size, so it means you can make something bigger about the preview or something pretty small depending on what you want to do. If I just go in this area, you can find blue, bumps, colors, distort. And I have these different type of options, as you can see, image effect, image draw materials, and you can see the preview because you change the terminal size here. I found something like maybe flex metal that can double click or you can also just click here. You can have access to a description on this area. If I select, for example, this one, you can see a description, waxy texture, which if I select morphology, acylc warm inside, you can find blue colorized contour fill inside. Let's select for example, warm inside. You can also click Apply and you can apply the adjustment filters just like this. So this is the first way. First way, you select filters, you can just directly apply a filter from this area, and as you can see, you can do this type of work. But this filter gallery is pretty convenient because you can have the preview. It's not possible to edit anything, but you can have access to the preview as you can see. If I want something to distort, I will select, for example, this one, double click and I can distort my circle to obtain this render. I go. This one term edges, I can distort this one to obtain this render as you can see. So this is a type of thing that we can do. If I want something like pulse, I will define ripuls. And you can apply multiple types of filter in shapes on how I can scale, I will keep my filters directly on this element. So this is how we can start. I'm going to zoom in zoom out. And after I'm going to show you more details how you can edit filters. 52. Add filters part 2: We're going to continue with the filters. We have seen how to add filters, we are going to see how to edit filters. To add filters, as I explained, we will create first rectangles, I will select rectangle tools and we will crat rectangles just here. This rectangles will place on this area, we will dial bitter size. So as I explained, you can go on filters. When you go on filters, you can apply any filters here. Like, for example, I'm going to select one of these. I will select, for example, this one, and as you can see, you can add filters. The second way to add a filters, you click on filters, you select the filters gallery, and you can have access to the different categorize, and you can select a render from one of these different categories. For example, I can apply this one. Now if you apply filters, like, for example, I decided to apply this one, I have the possibility to go on filters and to have access to the filter editor. When I click on the filters Editor, you can see deactivate the filters or activate the filters. As you can see, this is the filter that I just created. And we use just before the ripple some pel filters. So the repel filters can appear here. You have a number on the right, it is just a number of shapes concerned by the filters. So what does it mean? It means that I can add a circle just below. I will click here. I will come back to this one, and I will, for example, apply some other filters, clic materials, and I will use maybe this one. And as you can see, the filters will appear on this area. And now if I just click on this, I will select this one and as you can see, use. What does it mean it means that we have use these filters on one sheps. If I was using two shapes, I will have two on the right. Now, something that we can do, why we have ripple Because just before I use ripples, as you remember, and this is why if I click here, I will have one on use and now zero on the iridescent Emax. Every time if you write a filter, the filter is appear here. Now if I complete, for example, with another one, I'm going to click on this one, and on this one, I will add another filters. I will put regen I will use maybe seen memory and I will double click here. I apply also these filters. If I go on these options on this area, now you can find here, and this area is not going to apply directly with the seal membrane, but you can see, we don't see because we see on this area ridiceneax just like that. So this is the type of thing that we can do. Now, if you remove the filters, you can click here and I will have access to the scene membrane, and I can remove this one. So from these panels, you have also the possibility to just add filters as well. So when you click on this area, you have show all filters input, and you can also craton your filters here. When you create on your filters, as you can see, the filters will appear on this area. But I have nothing inside. So I have nothing inside. So if I activate, nothing is inside. You can create a new filters and you can also create new filters for these panels. If I go on the filter number one, I have nothing inside. So what I can do, I can click here, I define filters. Let's define, for example, what I'm going to use, I will use one of the Biff filters, and I will use as borders. Now I use as borders. So if I go here, you can find the filters border inside the filters number one. But you can double click and rename. So for example, I can apply these filters, borders. And after to apply these filters, borders, as you can see, I can just go outside. And after to go outside on this area, we can have access to different options like struck paint and composite Goshen blue, composite, ashen blue composite. And just all the element composing these filters. And I can edit this one. So what does it mean? It means to compose this filter, we have some Gaussian blue, and I can adjust the Gaussian blue value like this. This is how you can adjust the filters because you can now have the possibility to edit the filters here first with the first parameter, the Gaussian blue. Now we have another parameter. This is composite. Here we can change the type of operation. Inside or outside, but you have more options, as you can see. We have the Gaussian block here again, and we have another way of Gaussian blow. We have now composite specular lighting as well, and I can modify the specular lighting like constant value. We can address the exponent. We can work with Azimutan elevation. And depending on the filters that you choose, you will have different type of option here. We have again, composite and composite again. This is all the element composing your filters. If I select this one and I want to apply another filter. I will click on this one and I will go back on this area and we will select er filters. I'm going to use maybe maybe I will have this one, protusions, ridges, scatter, shadows, what I can use. I will use maybe this one. I will use, for example, wood paper. I will double click and I created this wood paper effect, as you can see. Now after to do this work, I can go on the right and to have root paper, as you can see, with one I can double click to rename, I will tape paper just like this. I have this filter number two, this one I want to remove. You can delete to current filters. You can also duplicate the current filters here. If I delete, I can remove and I will have now paper accessible. When I click on papers, what we have, we have these different options. So as you can see, we have a lot less options. And for any type of filters that you will use, you will have access to these panels and the possibility to edit the filters. So on the right, you have also different elements. You can also click on the right. You have different element, but I think it's a little bit more complex. You can focus more on this area. So for example, we have the turbulence, and I can adjust the turbulence, as you can see with the size, just like that. I can adjust with a livid of details. I can adjust with the scene. Can adjust the first element of these filters. It is a turbulence and we have different options. I can also use turbulence or I can use fractal noise. Here we have the displacement map, and I can use a scale value, just like this. I can use a scale value, just like this for the displacement. Here we have the different type of options. We have also diffuse lighting composite. Diffuse lighting can adjust as well, so we can change the constant value. We can change the surface scale, but also aimate value and elevation value. So as you can see, you can really adjust your effect using this one. We composite and one more time in or out. But you have more options. You can also use default. Over in this case, we use in to have the effect all inside. You can use also composite. We can adjust little bit of composite value, and it will make, as you can see, depending on what you choose, you can adjust with the first factor. You can also adjust with more factor, but don't touch this too much because it's a little bit more specific. And we can find the last thing. This is a blend effect. And after to do all this type of work, as you can see, it will appear on this area. So the filter editor will be here. So now I have the shapes with the filters editors, and we have this one with this filters editor. It works for any type of element. But my advice if you want to use the filters, you can just temporarily open these two elements. You select the filter that you want on this area, you apply the filters that you want. And then if you are satisfied, you can just stop here. But if you want to adjust more, you will click on this area and you have access to the filters that you need. If, for example, you want to duplicate a filter, you can also duplicate clicking here. And if you want to remove a filter, you can just remove clicking here, and I will be able I will remove and remove this one. And if I remove this one, as you can see, I will redjt my original shapes. So that's it. This is how you can work with the filters. 53. Logo landscape part 1: To no ice so so mortal. This is this one. This this way. My you make experience. That sexual activism and I would like to be in the back for this, with this symbol we will select all right click here to group. A as Mo make so so much, what is the clitce so the second is in I Could you take you take this. And the Selaglag. Or to L He's like exact, et cetera. He Sure. So let's take a look to this base. I have this element, this group. After we'll focus group, but at this time, we can still keep this group. We have this element. We're not going to create a complete group. Just stay with this one and this one. We can just dragging and moving a little bit more on the top. I just need to check that my group and my rectangle are in the milders inhaling and distribute panels we can use relative to page, and I will use center on the vertical axis. 54. Logo landscape part 2: We're going to continue with this logo. And for this, something that we are going to do it is to select the circle tools, and we will zoom on this area, and I will create circles. So we'll create a circle here, we'll press Control to keep the proportion just like this. We'll change little bits of color, we select to different color. We'll go on fill and stroke, and we'll select to clear green color like this first. I will play this circle around here, and I will duplicate first I will place on the backgrounds. So I will place total in the backgrounds, and I will duplicate with Control D. I will make another one little bit darker just like this, and maybe it's not enough, like, for example, this color, and I will place on the back also, and I will dragging and moving hoops. I will dragging and moving this one around here and this one around here. Let's put this one maybe, just like that. And I will duplicate with Control D again. I will move here, I will make something one more time more darker, and I will place on the back as well. And we will place maybe this one just like this. This one maybe like this, this one around here, and this one, yes, I think like this, it will be pretty convenient. Maybe this one we can just scroll down below. So after to do this type of work, I need to crack a cut. Maybe we can put this one here and this one more around this area. I can select the Swiss circle and we can resize the Swiss circle. We can press control and scale the Swiss circle just like this. And now maybe it's going to be pretty better to adjust. So I will play this one, I think, like, like this. I will deactivate the snapping options. I will play this one maybe just here, and I will play this one maybe just here. Yes, perfect. So after to do this work, I need to crat cut. So for this, what we will use, we use the pain tools, and I will just create something to cut. So concretely, I will create a line, for example, here to here and until this part, this part and this part. We can define any color. And I will use a Bolan operation. We click on this circle and we will click on this pass, and we'll go on pass we select difference. And thanks to that, we can cut like this. And we can keep this group is going to work, as you can see. Then we will repeat this process. So we'll click on the Pen tools. We will go around this area, and we'll create pass just like this, left click, and I will select I will select this circle here, and I will select this pass and I will run pass, and I will select difference just like that. So thanks to that, I can obtain this wonder. Now we can select all this element like this, we can crate to group, right click create to group, and we can duplicate the group with Control D, and I will play this one just here. The problem is, as you can see, it's not going to fit. So I need to scale a little bit. I need to put this in the back first. I'll put this on the back. And yes, I will put this on the back and we'll try to adjust a little bit. And I will try to adjust maybe like this. The problem is if I try to adjust like this, as you can see, it's not convenient, so I will have to cut again. So if we do something like this, I need to cut. I would like to not cut this one. Maybe we can scale again, and I can try to place around here, but I think I will have to cut the element on the right. Let's try again. And Yes. We're going to place like this. Yes, here. And I need to repeat the process. So first group, we ungroup, we'll select the pen tools one more time, and we'll create a cut around this here until here, here and here. Then we'll select this circle and this pass will go on pass difference. I will repeat the process. I will click on the pen tools. We'll go around here until, yes, I need to cut also here, I need to cut on this area, just like this. Go outside. So as you can see, we can make something like that. And then we can select this circle and this pass will go and pass difference. And we'll repeat the process. We'll use the pass tools, and we'll click here until this area. And we will select this circle and we will select this element. And we will create a pass. We will use difference. So now I can create to group again, so we can group this difference circle again. I will go right click. I will create to group, and we can we can just stay like this. It's going to work. So after that, what I will do, I will use text tools, and I will go left click here, and we will tape house for sale. So we'll tape us for sales and I will scale, I will reduce the size, we place house for cell here, and I will double click to change the font family. What font family we will use, we will go back on these directions. And the font family that we will use hoops will be Franklin gotiEVT one. And I'm in Italy, I will come back to normals, perfect. And I will double click to select this part and this part will be in green. So this part we can repare the green color. But all the green will appear here. So it's not a problem because here I know this is this green color. And here for sale, I know that we use this red color. So I will use this red color. And I will place house for sale here. We can just activate again the snapping options. So thanks to that, we can move on this area just like this and we can press Control to scale until to snap here. If we want, we can move a little bit on this area to Brit little bit of proportion just like this. Now we can define the space that we want, and maybe we can define the space around here. Maybe I can let a little bit more space. So this one we can move a little bit more, just like that, and this one we can move a little bit more as well. Maybe a little bit more again. And that's it. We have finished for this logo. So as you can see, pretty interesting logo with the green color and the red color. I will say, A, I will press right click, I will create a group, and I will scale so we can scale the logo. We keep perfectly to proportion one more time so as you can see, it's pretty convenient. And after that, you can check to pull the group in the center. I will deactivate the snapping option. I will go on the Almen distribute and I will select center and center and it's okay for this logo. 55. Logo coffee part 1: In this training, we're going to create a logo, and it's going to be a logo for coffee. And for this, we will work with different elements. We will create a symbol. We will add text, we will work with transformation, and we will work with a contrast between brown colors and contrast with white colors. So, the first thing that I'm going to do it is to select the rectangle tools here. I will start with rectangles and I would like to create a rectangle on the backgrounds. I will go on the right. I will activate the snapping options, and I will place my rectangle on the top left corners, and I will extend to snap here, and I will extend to snap here. We need to choose a dark brown color first. I will go on the right. I will select fill and stroke, and on the field colors, we will go around the orange here, and then we can search a brown color. We can select, for example, this type of brown color maybe this one. So after to do this work, I will zoom a little bit, and we will create a rectangle. Is the rectangle tools, I will create a rectangle like this. We'll define color like a red color, we extend a little bit on this direction and this direction. And I think we can place the element bond, yes here, and I think it's going to be pretty good. So after to do this work, I will create circles, and we'll create a circle here. We will define a color. I will work with a blue color, and the aim is to place the circle here, and you need to place a bonding box to this position and this one to here. And we need to repeat the same process with Control ED. You can duplicate and you can place another one here. The aim is going to create a cylinder. And as you can see, we can create this type of things. So now after to do this type of work, I will select this element, this circle shift this red element, and we will go on pass we select Union. So here we have only one entity. And in this entity, we will go on strike here. And what we will do we go unfill first. So fill will recuperate the brown color that we have on the background. So it means this color. And then we will activate a stroke paint, click on the stroke and we will activate the white color to create some contrast. And the stroke style, we can define a value here. For example, in pixels, maybe you can work around 20 pixels. And I will select the circle here. And these circles, I will apply feel. A, we will recuperate the brown color just like this. And I will go on stroke, paint. I will activate a stroke, and in the stroke style, we will define 20 as well, and the element can be on the front. Now what we can do, we can select the circle tools. And with circle tools, we can create circle just like this for circles. And we can press Control D to duplicate, and I will place another one on the back, so I will go on the back like this. Oops, I will yes here, and I will press shift and control to scale a little bit. I think it's too big, we'll reduce with shift and control, this one, then this one will reduce with shift and control just like that. I think this can be pretty convenient. I can select this. We need to apply 20 millimeters and this one I need to apply 20 millimeters. But if I do something like this, as you can see, I need to reduce this one. So we'll reduce more this one, I think, like this. It's going to be more convenient. And this one let just change. Let's put a value of 20 millimeters, just like that, and I think it's pretty good. So now what we will do will take the first circle. I will check, yes, we have 20 millimeters. I'll take the first circle, shift the second one, and we can dragging and moving these two circle. So I'll be dragging and moving these two circles around here, just like that. And I need to change a little bit of position only one step. But the problem is this rectangle on the back. We need to put totally on the back, yes. And now we can recuperate this view. So I just adjust little bit. I'll say this circle and these circles. We can scale a little bit if we need. We can try to scale a little bit. But if we scale little bit, something that we need to do it is to adjust. So I need to click here and to put again 20 millimeter. Yes, just like that. And this one I can scale a little bit again, shift control, and I can put again 20 millimeters. Every time shift control to keep the proportion and to scale from the center. Maybe you can press Shift control again to reduce again, and I need to adjust 20 millimeter. So that's it. Now it's pretty good. I will select all this element. I will crat frame of selection from here, and we will just crap to group. So I will go right click crap to group perfect. And we're not going to center because we can use the Ailing and distribute panels here. But if we center, we have something strange because of this element. So we're not going to center. We're going to place around here and move little bit around this direction first. Another thing that I'm going to do it is to see the paint tools. And with the pin tools we'll go on the top here, and I will start with first line here. A second line will craft small curves and a second line like this. And then I can press Enter to validate. I will adjust with my n Sharp point. We'll click the sharp point tools, and we will dragging and moving these handles. We dragging and moving these handles. I will adjust little bit here and adjust little bit here. So now we have also this one. So we can just change a little bit of curves, and just try to adjust here. And this one I can try to adjust like this, and maybe you can make a better curve if I extend these handles, and extend this handle make a better curve. So now we have this element. We will scale a little bit on these directions. Maybe you can double click and move a little bit, yes, just like this. And something that will do, I will place a first one around here. I think it's a little bit, we can scale little. I need to go on the fill and stroll because we still have fill options, and on the fill options, I will deactivate. And we can play this one around here. Maybe I can extend a little bit on these directions. And in the stroke style, we can recuperate the value of 20, and now I can duplicate with Control D. I will duplicate the first time with Control D. I will deactivate this one and press Control D to duplicate a third time. Now we can select this sweepers and we can go into Ag and distribute panels. We can make relative to the last selected, and we can halgn here bottom edge. Then we can use this distribution horizontally with even horizontal gap. We can create a group as well, right click group, and we can place the group around I think here, maybe we can move a little bit on the top, and let's do something like this. Now I will select these two groups. We have two groups here, and we can go right click, we can group again, and that's it. We can then have our symbols. Oops I'm not sure I created a group. No, I didn't create a group. Let's select again this 21, right click Group, and now it's okay. So now what we will do, we'll play this one around here, not perfectly in the center. I think here on this Rights pretty good, and it's going to be maybe a little bit more on the left, and it's gonna be okay for the first part of this logo. 56. Logo coffee part 2: We are going to continue with this logo. We have seen how to create this different element and we are going to continue. And for this, something that I'm going to do it is to add text. So we'll click on the text tool here. We will go on this area, and I will go left click and I will tap something. I will tap the Luna place here. And as you can see, we don't see anything because we need to apply colors. I will go on fill and I will activate colors, and we will select the wise color. Then we can scale a little bit, and I will change the font family. I will double click here, and I will select all the element, and I will change the font family. What font family will choose will go on this area, and I will select Candara. But for Kandara I will switch for bolt just like this. And after that, we can scale the lunar place. I want to scale a little bit also the size and we will break the proportion to adjust on the height. So will scale little bit here on the eight, as you can see. And we place the lunar place, yes, I can scale little bit more around here and maybe we can increase again. So after to do this type of work, maybe it's a little too much. Maybe it's a little too big. Let's just reduce little here and adjust little bit on these directions. Then we will duplicate with Control D. We'll work with liment and distribution after. Then we will scale here, and I will taper tape coffee roaster just like this. And we will place coffee roster. But here we will make something a little bit smaller. I would like to add the stars one on the left and one on the right. For this, we can select the star tools. We can click here. We can define the star mode. On this area, if you are not on five, you can go on five corners spoke ratio 0.5. I can crack stars here, press Control, and you can turn to have the summit in the right position. So it means concretely here, and I will place these stars on this area. I will reduce it bits to B and we place this one here. And I will duplicate with Control D and we will duplicate to have another one on the right. As you can see, it's pretty good. Now what we need to do, we need to work with alignment and distribution. So first, we will start with this one. I select the stars here, and I will select COF roster and I will selict second star. We'll go in the halin and distribute panels relative to, for example, we can put the biggest object, it means it will be the text in this case, and I will center on horizontal axis, and I will use distribute horizontally with even horizontal gaps. Now, as I explained, if you want to center all the element on the page, you need to create a group or it's not going to one of the interest of the group, right click. You create to group automatically the relative to will be changed for page and you can center on your page. So it means on your document in this case. When I select the lunar place, I can also put relative to page and I can activate Center. So now what is the aim. The aim is to try to have something better about the position. Concretely, we have this element. So this element, we can try to a little bit the position around here, so Narclas and we have coffee roaster. So we are going to move a little bit this one here, move a little bit, this one here, like tootin something like that, and we'll center more of the element. So concretely we can create a frame of selection with all the content expect the bron rectangles. And if looks okay, I will go right click, I will create a group, and now we have a group with all this element. We can also scale the group with all this element. I can scale the group just like this on my convenent and I will go on the link and distribute panels relative to page, center, and center, and we will obtur this render just like that. But maybe in this case, it can be pretty decent to not be perfectly in the center and to move little bit on the top just little bit like this. I think it will be pretty better like that. So not perfectly in the center because it looks not very balanced when we put everything in the center in this case. So sometimes we need to work like this. So one more time, two main colors. So first main colors is the brand colors, and the second one is a white color, and we have contrast. Something interesting is you can switch the logo with different backgrounds. So for example, you can select the rectangles here to select the Bn rectangles. I think I created a group with a brown rectangle, yes. Right click. Let's ungroup. Let's just keep the rectangle. And I can set the rectangle. You can try different one so you can see your logo with another one. If you switch with another one, it's possible, but you will have to change the color here as well. But if, for example, you enter inside this logo, and you enter inside, for example, I can double click, double click, double click. If I select this one and I'm going to fill options, I can deactivate the field. But if I deactivate the field, I will see this one on the background because I didn't create a cut. So we can maybe stay like this. Something that you can do it just I'm not going to do this here, but something that you can do concretely, it is you can stay like that. You can try different backgrounds. And if really you are satisfied with another background, you can try different one, but you need to keep in mind that you need to create contrast. You are satisfied with one on no background, you can have to change the color and fill this different area with the same color. But in this case, as I explained, the brand color will be pretty good, so I can reprere this brand color, and we can use a brand color in this type of case. 57. Logo ground part 1: In this training, we're going to create a logo, and for this, we will work with different type of transformation. We will work with different types of operation, it will be interesting training to work with this logo. So the first thing that I'm going to do it is to select the circle tools, and we will define colors. I will select these colors, and I will press Control to perfectly create complete circles. I will define a color we use finance stroke, and I will define a color like this one, and I will place my element in the center. Then we will duplicate with Control D. I will duplicate. I will define another color like maybe this one, and I will scale a little bit with shift and control to stay with the center, and I will put this in the background. We'll click here and we'll put in the background, and I will scale little bit more like this. I'll set my two circle. I will radiate with shift and control to upturn this type of render. So now what I will do I can open directly to line and distribute panels, and I can use center and center first. After to do this type of work, we will create a rectangles, and I will create a rectangle on this area. And this rectangle will use this clear blue color, and I will place my rectangle just here. After that, this rectangle zoom, as you can see, we have the Midle here and we'll move little bit on the left, little bit on the left that the Midal point. And I will create shapes. I will select here the polygon tools. And with the polygon tools, I will click on regular and I will define Sui. Corners here. And we'll crack polygon, three corners, and I will press shift to put the summit on the top just like this, and I will place my rectangle just here in the center on the bonding box. Sometimes if we not snapping, you need to zoom a little bit. I will adjust little bit on the left until here, and I will scale a little bit on this direction. I think this rectangle is too high, we are going to dies and this one we are going to snap here as well. Now what I will do, I will create rectangles. I will create another rectangles around here. This rectangle we can snap to this point. We can define another color first, we can snap to this boding box, and we can adjust and as you can see, we can make just here, you can snap to have exactly the same size that this area. And now what we can do, we can adjust little bit rectangle on the right, just like that, maybe around here. And after two. And I think we can reduce, we can put little bit inside. Yes, just like that, we can put little bit inside. Maybe this one we can go a little bit on the right on the left, and this one little bit on the right, and this one we can snap here. I think like this, it will be pretty better. So after that, I will convert this one. I will go on pass, object to pass and double click to select this handle point and to snap to this one. The problem is, if I do something like this, the one is not going to move. So I have two options. I can select the two element and we can work like this. We can also go on the selection tools and we can use a shared value just like that. But I think it's not the best. The best way is to double click now because we convert to pass you select this handle and this handle we shift to select the two handles and you can dragging and moving just like this. Now we will create another dictangle. I will create another direct tangles, just like this. And this rectangle, let's select an color like this one, and I will put the rectangle here and we will extend until this area and extend until this area. So now we need to work with different colors. I will select this element fill and stroke. We'll select different type of blue color like maybe this one. Then I will select this one, and I will recuperate this blue color and we will make something a little bit different. Then we'll select this one. We'll recuperate this blue color, and we'll make something a little bit darker, just like this. And then we'll select this one. We'll recuperate this color, and I will make something a little bit darker as well, just to upturn, maybe something like this. And on this one, I will make something a little bit more darker again. And thanks to that, I can obtain this render. Now the last step is to select this rectangle and to select the circle on the back, so range circle into pass division. And thanks to that, you can just have an element like this. And this element, as you can see, you can recuperate the color. I think division is not the best. I'm going to come back here. And I will do another one. I will click on this rectangle, shift the circle, and I will go and pass here, and we will select something like fracture. And thanks to that, I can have this small area, and we can delete this small area and we can delete these small hoops, and we can delete this small area as well. You prefer, if you want to be sure, let's just come back. If you want to be sure, you can extend a little bit this rectangle outside and this rectangle outside. You select this rectangle and the circle here, the orange circle. You can go and pass fracture. And now you can really see this element and you can dragging and moving and you can be sure. I will select this blue rectangle, shift, the orange rectangles, and I will go on pass. I will select here. Fracture, and it's pretty convenient because we can chart this element and we can perfectly keep this one. And I will press delete and we can keep this one and keep this one. So as you can see, it's pretty good. So now what we can do, we can have all these element. We can go right click. We will define a groups. And this group, if we need to scale, we can scale little bit as you can see, and I will place my group around here first. And that's it for this first part. 58. Logo ground part 2: We're going to continue with this logo. So for this, we have created this element, as you can see. Something that we will do it is to crater rectangles and we'll crater rectangle just here, and this rectangle, we will adjust the color. I will go in fill and stroke, and I will adjust with this type of dark green color. Yes, just like this little bit close to the blue, but not perfectly. And after that, I will scale a little bit more, and I will duplicate with Control D, we duplicate with another one. And after to do this type of work, this one will increase a little bit of size here, little bit of size here, and double click to apply rounded corner. And I can extend a little bit on this area and double click to apply rounded corner again. And I will play this one around this area just like that. So now we will select this one and this one, and we can crate to group. I will go right click. I will not create to group, I will go on pass, and I will select Union. And I will put my element in the foreground so I will put in the foreground and we'll place an element around here first. First here. And I will crater one, I will press Control D, and I will create anor Maybe this one we can reduce the size. Place one maybe like this, and this one little bit bigger, but not too much around this area. And we can do something like that. And this one maybe, just like this. I can deactivate the snapping options and this one just like this. So now something that we can do. Maybe this one we can place here, and this one we can increase a little bit of side. Let's make something a little bit bigger. After to do this work, I will click on this one and click on the orange rectangle. We can move little bit here. This one and the orange rectangle will go and pass, and we will select division. Try again, I will click on this element and orange rectangle, I will go on pass and division. The problem is not going to work properly. I will go here, here, pass, and I will select fracture. If I select fracture, I'm going to recuperate this element, but the problem is it's not going to work properly. I'm going to work in a different way. Why it's not working properly because I have a group here. So on the back, I have a group, so it's not working properly. So I need to go right click, I need to ungroup. And after to ungroup, now it's going to work. So I can click on this element and the orange circle, I will go and pass, and I will select division just like that. And if I select division, I will have multiple pass created, and as you can see, I can have this one. And if I define a color, I can define a color here and put, for example, on the front. And one of the problem it's not working properly in this case. I will obtain this one. And yeah, the division is not working properly. I'm going to undo. I will come back to this step because it was not working exactly like I want. Yes, it's because I didn't select it the right circle. I will click here and I will click on this circle the yellow circle. I will select the yellow circle with this element, I will go and pass. I will select division, and now it's going to be betters. And I can click on this area, and as you can see, we can recuperate some colors and now it's going to work. And in the fill and stroke panels, we can adjust we can recuperate to colors, and I will recuperate this color and it's going to work properly. I can select the orange circle and I can select this element. I will go and pass. I will say divisions. And it is same, I can recuperate this color. Oops, just recuperate this color. So I will click on this element, and with these panels, I will recuperate this color, just like that. The problem is, as you can see, we cannot directly put this one. So if I select the yellow circle and this element, I will go and pass and I will select division. We will obtain this element and I can re parateF example, this green color. But the problem is we don't have the other elements. So in this type of case, we'll work differently. We'll select this element, shift orange rectangle, and we'll go on pass and we'll select like we have done on the blue rectangle, we select fracture, and thanks to that, we can cut this element and we can do something. This is why the Bolan operation are important. I'm going to select all this element. I will cra to group. We will scale little bit to group, just little bit and the Alina distribute panel center. We'll add some text. I will click on the text tools, and we'll go here. We will tape Landscape. Um, for the font family, we can select all. I will use the Calibri font family one more time. It is a pretty interesting font family, simple but efficient. And here we will work with bold. And I will increase little bit of size. We'll put landscape around here, and I will duplicate with Control D, and I will scale little bit to dits and we will tape here structure. So I will tape structure directly. And we'll increase little bit of size, we change and we'll adjust the color. So I will see landscape. I will select, plan stroke, and we'll recuperate the dark blue colors that we have here. And I will select structure, I will select A, and with hydroperTol, I will recuperate the orange color that we have here. So in this case, in this logo, we'll work with multiple color. We don't do this too much, but in some case, it can be interesting. But one more time, generally, we use only two color contrast between two color. But in some case, you can make multiple color for sure. But the big majority of the time it generally will work with two color and contrast between two color. And I can move little bit this one, move little bit this one just here. I select landscape, Alga distribute center, structure, Alina distribute center. And this one I will check in the center. Perfect. I can select all now, right click, try to group for this logo, layer on the object, and I can dragging and moving just like this. I will put this close to the center, and I will go Al and distribute center and center like this, and it's okay for this logo. 59. Logo furniture part 1: In this training, we are going to create a logo, and for this, we will create a logo for furnitures, and it will be interesting training. We will work with different types of shapes. We will create a symbol, and we will work with a brown color in this logo. We are going to this. The first thing that we are going to do is to start with the circle tools. We're going to create two circle with stroke. I will create a first circle here and I will press control on this area around this size and we will put the circle in the midl. I will using the snapping options, and we can snap to the middle of our page. I will go and fill and stroke on the fill options, I will deactivate the colors. I will go on stroke paints, activate the stroke, and we will work with a brand color. So we'll se the brown color because it is logo for furniture so I think it's pretty good. And we'll select, for example, this type of brown color. Then I will select a stroke style just like this. I will scale a little bit from center, and for the stroke style, we will adjust the size. Here, I change for pixels, but you can switch again for millimeter if you need. And here it is in millimeter, you can switch in, in millimeters. And here we are, for example, 20. I'm going to ts 20. After I will duplicate the circle, I will press Control D to duplicate. And then I will put in the background, lower selection to bottom, and I will scale with shift and control to keep the proportion from the center. And we can just scale like this. After that, I will reduce the wide here to make something smaller. And what type of size we are going to do, we can make something like, for example, 12. I think we are a little bit outside. 12, I think it's too much. Just step ten, and I will scale a little bit. I will arrive closer like this, and we need to adjust with ten again. And I will obtur this type of render. Maybe we can scale a little bit, just like this, and I will adjust with ten. So after to do this work, we'll create a symbol. We create a symbol like sofa using different rectangle. We'll zoom on this area first. And I will select the rectangle tool. I will create small rectangles here, and this rectangle will adjust with a fill and stroke value. So in the stroke pane, we can remove. In the field options, we can activate the colors, and I will create with a dropper tools, these brand colors. And we'll play this rectangle around here. I will extend a little bit on this direction, just like that. After I will duplicate with Control D, and we will place another one here, I will deactivate the snapping option or I will be in trouble and I will scale a little bit on this area. Yeah, maybe this one I can scale a little bit also just like this. This one like this, you can press control to stay on the same axis, and I will duplicate with Control D to place another one. I will press control, and I will ops scale this until around this area. After to do this type of work, maybe we can move little bit this one, move little bit this one here, and this one little bit like this. And I think we can six these different rectangle, extend a little bit, just like that. And I will double click on the rectangle on the top, and we will add little bit rounded corner, not too much, but little bit here. I will create another direct tangles. We go on the left here. And as you can see, we can create direc tangles. This rectangle, I will double click to have non rounded corners, and I will play this one around here. I will extend a little bit on these directions. Maybe, yes, just like that. I will extend a little bit here, and I will press Maybe it's a little too much. I can reduce a little bit more like for example, this one, and I will press Control D to duplicate and place on the right. So it's okay for that. Now what we need to do we need to work with igment and distribution. For this, we can select object. First, I will come back here and we'll go on object, haline and distribute. Oops, I need to deselect everything first, and I will go on object and Oops, yes, ling and distribute now. I will select first this rectangle, this one, and this one. So these three rectangles, and I will allo center to the page. So I need to move this one because yes, it's going to be very convenient to center to the page, and at the same time, the three rectangle, we can use this distribution. Now I will click on these rectangles. I will place around here, this one around here, and I will select this rectangle, this one, and this one. I will align to the bottom edge just like that. But the problem is we're in the bottom to the page, so it's not going to work properly. And I need to be on, for example, maybe we can select the biggest object and we can align center like this. Perfect. Now I can check that everything is okay with this one and align with the distribution again, yes, it's going to work. And if I see this rectangle, shift this one and this one. We can also use a distribution, distribute horizontally. But because I distributed horizontally, I need to select this rectangle, this rectangle, and these rectangles, and I need to move and to be in the center. I can create a group to right click group. I can go in center and now right click and group again. So now if everything is okay, I have the right distribution. What does it mean it means I can create a selection of all this element. And I can go right click, I can create to group, and as you can see, we have created these sofa symbols. After that, if we want to adjust, we can scale, we can reduce. Maybe we can do something here. I think it's pretty good, and I replace my symbol around this area in the haline and distribute panels relative to page we ling to the center. And that's it. So this is the first thing that we are going to do for this local back here page. And after we add text, we'll add also some elements to finish discretion. 60. Logo furniture part 2: We're going to continue with this logo. And for this something that we are going to do it is to create rectangles. I select the rectangle tools, and I will create a rectangles around this area. And this rectangle will choose anoer color. I'll select the red color just like this. Something that we can do it is if we place the rectangle like that, we can work like this. I want to show you something. If you place the rectangle, in the distribute center and center just like this, maybe we can work here. And I define, for example, I convert this circle pass stroke to pass, struck to pass, and I select the circle pass, struck to pass. And then if we select this circle, shift, we select the rectangle, we go and pass, and we select difference, we can crat to cut like this. But don't forget to convert to pass this circle. If you don't convert to pass this circle, it's not going to work properly. And before to do this, I need to duplicate also this rectangle. So I will come back, I will press Control D because I want to repeat after seven times. So now I can repeat this operation. I will select this first circles, this rectangle, and I will go on pass, and I will select difference. Now I will place again this rectangle here. We can activate the snapping option again, or I can just click on center and center. It's going to be pretty better, and I will select this circle shift, the red rectangle, pass difference, and I will obtain this render as you can see. Could just create a rectangle putin wise, but the problem is, if never one day we want maybe to apply a background or something like this, maybe it's not going to be extremely convenient. It depends on the situation. Here, I decided to create this body and operation. Then we'll select the text tools. We'll add some text here, and I will tap four knee che. On this area, we can type furniture. We can double click. I will select all the text. We will recuperate the brown color in the fill and stroke panels, and I will click to the eyedropper to recuperate the brown color. Now if I select all the text, I will change the font family, and we will use with the letter G Gill son ultra bolt, and we can use this one. After to click on this one, I will place furniture around here. Maybe we can adjust little bit the size. It depends. Maybe it's a little too big. I will deactivate the snapping option, scale a little bit on this direction, and place this one just here. Maybe we can extend a little bit more. If I just go on line and distribute, we can center perfectly our element. Maybe I can zoom a little bit and extend again, center and center. And I think like this it's going to be pretty good. Now what I will do I will click on furniture and I will press Control D to duplicate, and I will decrease the size with control to keep the proportionality. And when we arrive around close to this size, I will double click to edit the content, and I will tape quality. But we tape high quality, we'll tape high quality place around here, and I will create two line, one of the left and one of the right. I will select the line tools. For this, we can select the pen tools, and I can create a small line with one point here, press Control to stay horizontally, another point, and you can just press Enter. Now we have this line, I need to go in the fill and stroke option in the stroke style. We will here go in the stroke pin first, and I will activate stroke with this brand color. Then we'll go on stroke style. I will select just the lines, and we can reduce. We can reduce the size. Here we're going to set the cap. I was in roundy drain. Round Cap, this is what I want to do to have some rounded corner on this area. And we are going to work with maybe a value of si, and I will place my small line around this area. Maybe it's too B, we can adjust a little bit. Yes, just like that. And I will duplicate this line with Control D, and we will duplicate on the right. Just here, I can place. And I will select the first line, then the text, high quality shift the second line. In the line and distribute panels, we can work with the distribution. First alignment relative to what relative to maybe the biggest object, and we can apply this one center on horizontal axis, and then distribute horizontally with even horizontal gaps. Then we can create to group, right click Crate to group, and thanks to that, I can the line and distribute panels to the page, I can center if the element. Maybe you can adjust the position around here. Then we'll create stars just below. And for this, I will click on these tools. We can select the star tools. Here you can define the number of corners. So for stars, we can stay with five corners. Spoke ratio 0.5 and press control, and you can turn little bit to create the summit on, for example, this area. Then we will place fro stars here. I will scale these stars. I think this size can be pretty good, and I will press Control D to duplicate, place here, and I will scale to radiate litters, and I will press Control D again, and I will duplicate on the right. So now we can obtain something like this. I can let little bit space here, little bit space here, and after we can work with lin and distribute panels. I'll take the first star shift, the second one shift, the third one. And when I go in the line and distribute panels, what we can do, we can make relative one more time to biggest object. It's going to work, and I will select center on horizontal axis. And then we can use this distribute horizontally with even horizontal gaps. Now one more time, you can keep the selection and every time it is the same process, you select your object, then you work with aligmenta distribution, and then you create a group to center all the element perfectly. So right click, let just create a group, and after I will be in the center just like that. Then I can just adjust the position, I can press control to keep the axis whether I can place more here or more here, for example. Maybe around this area, and I will go left click here and I will obtain this render. So now what we will do, I will just come back to layers and object, and that's it. We're finish. After I can select all the logo, I can go right click, I can crack a group. So here we have a group, and one more time, you can scale the group with control or you can increase. You can change the position, and as you can see, it's convenient, just like that. If you want to change the color, as you can see, we apply on everything, but you need to be careful, for example, in the case of the stars, or this line and this line, it's not going to be extremely useful, but just an overview. So after maybe you want to change all the color, you can change all the color. But for this case, I wanted to choose the brand color. And I can check linked center and center. And it's okay for this creation. 61. Logo letter part 1: In this training, we're going to create a logo. This logo will be a logo that I going to tell letters for the simple reason that we create a circle. We make letters in front and we will create different type of effect on this logo. So the first thing to do is to create a circle. It's like the circle tools. We will go around this area and we'll create a circle. We can press control to keep the proportion. So after that, I can center my circle. We can activate the snapping option on the right and we can center the circle in the middle of the document. After that, I will change the color would select some dark blue color first, and I will go on filling stroke and on filan stroke, we will use fill will deactivate the color, and we will use directly stroke paint. I will go on feel here, stroke paint, I will activate the colors and we activate some blue color like maybe this type of blue colors, and I will go in the stroke style to increase the white value. I can increase the white value, just here, and what white will apply, I will apply value of maybe we can type something like 40. So after to do this work, I will create a rectangle. I will create a rectangle just here, and we will change the color. First, I will go stroke pain, we deactivate the stroke. Then we'll go on the Phil Option and I will define a color like, for example, some orange color like this. And I will move this element and I will increase little bit size. As explained, for example, for this one, we have created a stroke style with 40. It means if I sic for example, this rectangle just like this, I have the possibility to when I take a look here, you have the wide and eight. We can adjust a little bit of wide and the eight. We can reduce we are working in pixels here. But when you are in fin Edtrck you are in millimeter. So if for example, you switch here and you define something like pixels, you can define a value in pixel. For example, I can choose 150 or this one. And for the rectangle, I can choose a wide, 150 as well, just like that. And thanks to that, I can extend a little bit on these directions, and I can put the rectangle around here. I will deactivate first this one. And I will extend a little bit the rectangle around this area. Then something that I will do, I will extend a little bit. I will press Control D, and I will place another one around, around here, just like that. And I will press Control D, I will crate another one. I will reduce size just like this. And as you can see, I have still 50. I will pick on this area. We can put this one here, put this one here. But for this one, we can when we move here, as you can see, we can not put 150, so it means here, I can extend, just like that. But for the eight, I can put 150, so I can put 150 for the eight, just like that. And now I can, for example, move, let's make something like this. So now if I want to have the right position, I would create a rectangle to create something like a guide, and I will change the color, and I will put a rectangle on the top here. And I will do something like this. Then I will press Control D, and I will duplicate this rectangle to place another one just on this area snapping to the edge, and thanks to that, I can select this and I can just put here until the top just here. So thanks to that, I can crack this type of guide. Then we can select this rectangle, this rectangle and this rectangle, and we can just dragging and moving in the fact that to be in the Midor. So how to process, you can group first. So you can go right click, you can group. And after two group, you can center perfectly. I can use, for example, object. Alg and distribute panels. I can open these panels and I can go in the center. Then I will ungroup right click and Ungroup. Oh, I think we have the right position now for these different letters. Maybe we can take this rectangle. We have a eight. Maybe we can extend a little bit to eight like 760, 760. And for this one, I will do the same thing. I will extend little bit to the eight, and I will tap as well 760. And I just need to adjust, yes, my rectangles here and adjust my rectangle. I just need to snap to this part, just like that. Yes. So it's okay for that. Now I can select this rectangle. We can delete. We don't need that anymore, and I can delete. So as you can see, if you want to perfect the center of the same space, we need, in this case, to find solution, and the solution was to create this type of rectangles. So now what we will do we will link this different element. So I will select this rectangle. I will press Shift, select this one, and I will press Shift and I will select this one as well. And we can create a union. So I'll go on pass here and on pass we select Union. And thanks to that, we just have one entity. I can even check on the Aing and distribute panels that we are in the center. So now I just have one entity Union, Kentl Center center, and as you can see, we are perfectly in the center. This is the first thing that we are going to do after we'll address the color, but first we start like this, aim is to have this element and this element and to place this with the right position and the right distribution in this space. 62. Logo letter part 2: We're going to continue with this logo. So for this something that I'm going to do to continue with this logo, we need to on this area, need to create a curt here, and I need to create a cut here as well. So I'll take the rectangle tools. We still have the snapping options activated, and I will create the rectangles around here, and the aim is to snap these rectangles to this part concretely and to align to show you you can align the rectangle like this, and you just need to snap here to have this space. And you can extend the rectangle here. Then you can duplicate again with Control D, and you can position another one here. So the aim is to create a cut on the circle. The problem is, it's not going to work properly if you select pass difference after to select the circle in the rectangle. Why? Because here we have a stroke. We don't have field with a color, we have the stroke. So what I need to do if I want this work, you need first to select the circles to go and pass, and you need to change the stroke to pass. Extremely important convert the stroke to pass. After to convert the stroke to pass, now it's going to work. But does it mean it means I can select the circle? I can press shift, I can select the rectangle, red rectangle, and I can go and pass and I can select difference. And now it's going to work, as you can see. I can repeat the process in the other way. I can select the circle, shift this rectangle, I will go and pass and I will select difference. And first, it's because you need to convert stroke to pass for this circle or it's not going to work properly. Now I want to create one entity. So what we can do, we can select the circle. Shift, we can select the element with a letter as a union, and we can go on pass and create one entity with union. And as you can see, we can obtain this render. So now we can put any color for this type of element. I would like to create something more in orange. But in this case, let's create a gradient on this area. So I will select the gradient tools we select the gradient tools here, and I will start maybe around this area, and I will create a gradient with two pred. I will take my first and this is my first stop here. We need to create a new linear gradient and to place the gradient in the fill options to apply fill and stroke, I will go on stroke paint here, and we can select the first stop, and the first stop will be some dark orange like maybe this one. And the second stop, we can click on the second stop, another type of orange like maybe this one, and I need to change the transparency to 100% with a value. And maybe it's a little too dark, I can do more, something like this, as you can see. Then we can address the point. So if we want to be more inside, we can adjust like that. In this case, I will go just a little bit maybe outside, just here, and I think like this, it's convenient. And as you can see, I can create a gradient on this area. So we can create a gradient. Want to adjust, we can select the first stop. I want to make something a little bit darker or brighter. It depends on the render that I want to obtain. Maybe I can do, something like this. And this point, maybe we can do something more like this. And we just validate and that's it. So we can create this type of logo, for example. Now, in this type of case, we are going to integrate on a background. In some logo, you are never going to integrate in a backgrounds. But in this case, I think it can be pretty interesting to create some contrast. For this reason, I will come back to the layer object here, and we define your rectangles. And I can crate rectangles here. And this rectangle, I will put with a different color like blue colors, and I will put on the back first. So we'll select lower selection to bottom. After to do this work, I will extend my rectangle. I will go snap on the top left corner and we just need to because we have the snapping option activity, do something like this. Now, as I explained to them is to create contrast. So because we have this with this type of orange color, sure we're not going to make the background in red. As you can see, it's not pretty good. It's not pretty good as well. So we need to create contrast. So contrast because we have a warm color here, the contrast will be something with cold color and darker. So what we can use, we can use red contrast. We can use, for example, the black color. The black color can be pretty good in this type of case. We can use also maybe some very dark purple color. Even purple is not very good because it's not enough contrast, so we can try something like this, but it's not enough contrast. In this case, what can be the best, the best can be the black color. So we can use, for example, the black color, or a dark blue color can be pretty interesting as well. So I can click on this area. And if you see clear blue, it's not good. So we need to create contrast to at least this blue color, and we can make something a little bit, as you can see darker. I think the best way to create contrast in this case will be the black color or some dark blue color. Dark blue color can be also pretty good maybe like this. And I can just validate here. After that, we have this element. So this element, if we want to scale, we can scale, as you can see, we have still our backgrounds. I want to increase again, I can increase again, and I can place in the center one more time, alg and distribute banels center and center, in this case. And that's it. So we are finished, as you can see, interesting training to create this logo, work with different type of shape, transformation, some boolean operation to link or j together, or, for example, to rat cuts and also add colors and crat contrast to generate this type of logo. 63. Logo music part 1: In this training, we're going to create a logo and it will be a logo that we will create for music and for this we'll create different type of shapes. We will work with contrast with the orange colors, and this is how we are going to create this logo. First things to do we select the rectangle tools and we will create a first rectangle on this area. So this rectangle will adjust the si with something more higher just like this. And we will play this first rectangle around this area like this. We can increase the size like a brown here and first we choose a orange color. So we'll go on fill in shock here will set orange color just like this. I will zoom little out. And we will double click to apply rounded corners. After to apply rounded corners, we can start to duplicate. Well duplicate multiple times. So first I will do Control D. I will go on the left. You can press Control if you want to keep directly the right positions and I can just scalize this. I will scale little bit to reduce the size and double click to adjust the rounded corner because we need to adjust the rounded corner if we resize. I will press Control D, and I will move a little bit on this area and I will resize, but don't for it to resize only for the eight and double click to adjust the size like this, and I will press Control D again, and I will duplicate again with scale little bit just like this and double click, and I will adjust the size just like that. And maybe I can reduce a little bit more and double click, and I will adjust the size. Now what I will do, I will select this different element and I will press Control D, and I will duplicate on this size, and we will just create symmetry. For this, we'll use flip selected object horizontally and I will place like that. I will place more element here. I will select this one, I will press Control D, and I will create another one, and we will increase again. I will go around this area, double click, and we will just adjust little bit size, just like that and double click, I will adjust the size again. And I will press Control D again. We will increase the size again one more time around this area, and I will press Double click and I will adjust the rounded corners. I will duplicate again with Control D, we duplicate here. We'll increase little bit of size, double click, one more time, and we can just make something like this. So I just need to put maybe this one little bit smaller than the big one that we are here to crack little bit different. I think like this, it's pretty good, and I will press Control D or I can press Control D, but something that I can do, it will be pretty better. You're selling this one shift. You're selling this one and you press Control D to duplicate these two ones. And you can just flip so you can use this flip selected object horizontally. And then I will work like that. Maybe this one we can increase a little bit more the size and don't forget to use double click to adjust the rounded corners after if you resize. So after to do this type of element, something that we can do it is to first, we can change a little bit the position of the different element. So it means we can make a little bit less space between the different element just like that. So we'll adjust the different space to make something shorter on the wise, just like this. After to do this top path for the most important thing is to work with a distribution. For this, we'll go in object features, we open the align and distribute panels. And if I'm satisfied about the position of the first element and the position of the last element like this, we can select all and after to select all we go on the right, and relative to we can sel here as the biggest object and we can use on this area. We can use Center on horizontal axis first and we can use this one, distribute horizontally with even horizontal gaps. Thanks to that, we can obtain this render. Then I can select all. I can generate to group, so rightly create a group, and I will scale little bit and place my element here. Then something that I will do, I will adjust a little bit the color. I think the orange is too strong. So we'll go in the field colors. Now we adjust to make something little bit more close to yellow, just like that. Then we'll select the group, adding a distribute center and center on the page, and we'll create a circle and we'll put a circle with a black color on the back. I will select the black color here. Oops. Yes. I will take the black colors, and I will use the selection tools to put this on the backgrounds, and we will go around this area. Then we will scale a little bit this element, like Brown maybe this one, just like that. And we can scale a little bit of circles, and we can play the circle with and distribute panel center and center. Then something that we can do, we can have this element in the center, this element in the center. We can select all cra groups, groups, and I will scale a little bit. And as you can see, this is just the base of the logo after we'll add a little bit more element, but the base of the logo will be this one, this group. And we can scale and first we'll place not totally in the center. We'll place little bit on the top because we'll add some text just below. And I will go on relative to page, I will check center on vertical axis. I think it's too big. Let's just reduce a little bit, place one more time in the center, and we can start with this base. So this will be the base of this logo, and after we'll add more element. 64. Logo music part 2: We're going to continue with this logo. And for this something that we can do it is to add text. And for this, I will select the text tool here, text tools, and we'll go around this area. And I will go left click to create some text, and I will tape the app. And we will use a specific font family first, I will scale little bit, and we will double click to edit the font family. I will select all the letters. And when we go here, we can select the fern font family. And what font family will select, I will select. Yes, I will select the Calibre font family. So I will search to the letter C, and on the letter C, we can find. I will click on this one. Have different type of option. The normal is not enough strong, as you can see. So I think I'm not going to use the normal, I'm going to use bold, so I will select one more time, the letters. I will go here one more time, and I will define bold. And after to define bold, we can go on this different area. We can just come back to the select tools and I will increase a little bit the size, and I will put lever up with around here. I just need to I will check the space here. We have only one liter, so it's going to be okay. I will duplicate, I will click here, will press Control D, and I will duplicate lever up and I will reduce the size. And I will double click to edit and what we will tape will tape sound effect. So I will taped effect, just like this. After I will use the selection tools, we will reduce a little bit more and we will play soon effect just be low. I think it's too small, let's increase thing like this, maybe level up, you can increase a little bit more. So effect little bit more, higher wider than the size of the circle just like this. I think like this would be pretty good. After it depends about what we want to do, we can make something really small, so it means we can make something bigger than these circles or we can make something smaller. So it means we can just put levers just like this, so we can reduce. We can reduce or we can increase. It depends about what we want to do. Maybe it's going to be a little bit better if I make something smaller in this type of logo. So I can reduce a little bit lever up and play this one here and soon reduce a little bit more and place this one here. So after to do this work, I will place my different element. I need to select lever up going in the Alinen distribute panel center. I need to select sound effect distribute panel center as well. Now we are just going to a rectangle on the background. I will create your rectangles and we'll create your rectangles. Here, I will adjust rounded corner just like this, and I will activate the snapping option to first snap on the top left corner. Then we can go on the right just like this. I will define another color first and I will snap here. I will go back to the flan struck panels and we have the layer object panels, on the flank panels, first, we'll put this in the background. So we'll lower selection and we'll recuperate this orange color like this. So thanks to that, we can work only with two color. So the orange color and the black color contrast. As I explained in logos, most of the time, we need to focus on contrast color and generally two colors and not much more. Sometime in few example, you can make multiple colors, but the majority of the time, you will have to just contrast with two color and it's totally enough. Now what I will do, I can select all this element here if I'm satisfied about the space. I can crate to group, I will go right click and I can crate to Group. So after to create a group, as you can see, I have this element, and I can dragging and moving, we have our arrange backgrounds, and we can dragging and moving. We can also scale like this if we want to increase. But in this case, it is important to the range background is important in this case. It's not just something that we have here. It is important. So this is why it's important here, in this case, to put this element with the right size. So if it's like this, concretely it's too big. So we need to reduce. If it is, it's generally too small. So I need to change and try to craft the right size. So concretely, I will scale a little bit. I will scale, I will scale, I will scale around. A fund this size will be pretty good. And in this type of case, orange background will be interesting. And I can adjust and distribute panel center and center on the page, center and center on the page. If I just go on this area, if you want to change the color, you can change the background color on this one, and you will have to change inside the group, the different small rectangle that we have created here, and you can try this logo with other types of color. Think orange color is pretty good in this type of case, but you can adjust little bit of color. If you want to change the background color here, and you replace the orange and inside, you can double click and inside the group, double click again, double click again, and you can change the color of these different elements if you need to try the logo in a different color. But I think with orange color, it's pretty good. So that's it. This is an example about what we can create with this logo. 65. Logo food part 1: In this training, you are going to cratologo and for this, this logo will be about a food market and we will work with different type of shapes. We will work with text as well and we will work with different type of operation. We will use the red color. So something that we will do first, it is to create a circle. I will select the circle tools. I will define the red color like this, and I will press Control to create a circle. We will zoom little bit, we place the first circle on this area, and I can use a snapping option to place my circle in the mier. I think's little too big, let's reduce a little bit first. After that, I will go in the fill and stroke panels, and I will apply a stroke. So first on the fill, I will remove, and I will go on stroke paint, and I will define colors. So for the stroke paint colors will work with red color. I will reopare this red color that we have here, but I need to put this for the stroke and for the feel no color. And for the stroke, I need to adjust little bits of color, yes, we use this one. And for the strokes style will increase little bits of size. We are in millimeters. Let's define something specific. I will define, for example, ten millimeter to make something simple. Then we will use the polygon tools, and with polygon tools, we'll crat polygon like this. And as you can see, I need to before to crab my polygon because here I didn't select any parameters. So before to do this, we'll select a number of corners. We'll increase the number of corner like maybe let's try 26, and we will add also rounded corner. So first, I will crat my polygon just like this, and I will adjust here. So we can adjust the number of rounded corner just like this. So the aim is to I think I need to work with stars, so I will work with stars here. And as you can see, yes, we can adjust like this, and now it's going to be pretty better. So I will adjust with a rounded value. And here we have also this one that we can use. And this one, yes, I think for this one, I need to reduce. So for this one, I need to reduce, yes. Let's try something around 10 point maybe 200. And this one, I will work with 0.2 yeah, I think around 0.43, and let's try to make something a little bit more rounded, but not too much. I think here it's too much. Yes, I will work with, like, yes, around this value, 0.4. And after that, I will place this element on the back here, we scale with shift and control. We'll put this on the back, and I will increase little bit of size just like this. Maybe if I double click, I have the possibility to adjust again and we have this pass. And I can adjust the number here. Maybe I can reduce a little bit the number of corners. I will put only 20 corners, it will be enough. I will increase a little bit of stroke in the stroke style, will increase a little bit of stroke to make something a little bit more higher and I will put something like 0.14, it will be pretty good. Just like that. So maybe you can make something higher. I will change a little bit what I wanted to do. I will adjust little bit and we'll make something higher. We'll make the double, and I will tape 20, just like this. So after to do this work, we'll select the circles. We will use the panels haline and distribute. We will put this in the center first, and then I will select this one and we'll put in the center as well. Then I will create a rectangle. I will create the rectangles just on the front, and this rectangle will use on fine strokes, stroke, pain, no fill will define colors, and I will define the blue colors just first like that. So what I need to do, um, I need to, I need to create a stroke. So I will go on the field value here, and the fill will remove and stroke paint. We can on the field, we can activate the white color. And on the stroke paint, we can activate the color just like this, like the rounded color, the rounded the red colour, these red colors. And we have also the stroke style, and here we can adjust but I think it's okay for the corners. We have different type of corners, just like this. And here we have this value. If I come back with a value of zero, yes, we'll obtain this render, and I will go directly on this area. And on this area, I will define stroke pan, stroke style, we will decrease, and I will decrease with a smaller value like maybe eight, just like that. Maybe with you apply ten, ten will be pretty good. I can apply ten. I can go in the distribute center and center. So now what I need to do, I can select this element and I can go and pass, stroke to pass. I can click on this element, this circle, pass, stroke to pass. And I will click on this one and pass stroke to pass as well. So now what we can do, we can create two circles. And I will create another circle. I will select any color fill and stroke. And on this circle stroke paint none, I will go with these colors, and I will play this circle here. Then I will scale until to snap on this area, as you can see, and we'll select this rectangle and this circle will go on pass and we'll select cut pass. And if I select cut pass, oops, not cut pass and make some mistakes, it's not cut pass. Yeah, this is cut pass. I will click here and click here. I will go on pass cut pass. And if I click cut pass, as you can see, we have this element just like that. And yes, we have cut this one, and it's perfect. I need to cut this one, and I want to cut this one as well. And now we can obtain this render as you can see. Now what we will do, we can select this element. We can put this on the back, and this one we can put this on the front. So I can just put this on the front and this one put this on the front. And something that we need to do is to adjust the color. So we have this element. If we go and fill and strop, we can go and fill. As you can see, we can fill with a white color. And this one we can fill with a white color as well. So now what we need to do we need to adjust. I need to adjust little bit inside, not too much, but I can adjust little bit inside. Yes, just like that. And here I can adjust little bit inside as well to increase the size. And I can select these two element or I can just select this element, this one, and then as you can see, we can just move like this and we can move like this. If we select these two element, we can increase a little bit the size on this direction. And in this type of case, it can be pretty interesting. And I can use one more time, this one, the white color, this one, the white color, and we can adjust little bit of position. We can also reduce. I think and I think it's pretty better if I reduce, it will be pretty better. So I will reduce a little bit until this area, and then we can try to adjust the position. We can adjust the position maybe here and a little bit on the left, and this one little bit on the right. And I will select this two element. I will go into align and distribute panels, and we can use this type of alignment just like that. And we can obtain this render. Then we'll select the two element, we generate a group, or click create a group, and we will center the group as well, just like this. For this one, we can address, as you can see, we have a circle like that. So we can try to make something like this here. 66. Logo food part 2: We're going to continue with this logo. So for this, something that we are going to do it is to add text. And for this, I will click on the text tool here, and I will zoom a little bit, and I will tap something on this area. I will tap food center. We will select all the different letters will go on the fill and stroke, and we can have the fill options, and we will recuperate this red color just like that. But if I double click here, we will recuperate the Calibri font family in bold, and then we can extend a little bit with food center, and I will place food center around this area. We can maybe scale little bit on these directions, and I will place food center around here. Then we will center to center, yes, we can do something like this. I can also select this group, as you can see, we can just scroll down a little bit below to make something a little bit below, not too much, just a little bit below, maybe just like this here. And I can use food center and we can move a little bit below, just like that. And as well. So I can move also a little bit below here. We duplicate food center. I will press Control D, we duplicate, we'll play this one around this area, and I will adjust. I will tape something, I will tape Sunday market. So we'll tape Sunday maarket. I will play Sundmarket here, we reduce it be size. We can keep the same font family, and I will duplicate again. I will press Control D, we duplicate, and we will double click here, and after to double click, I will tapetL Sunday Market, and I will tape Festival as well. So after we'll place festival around here, I think it's pretty good and Sunday market around this area. After to do this type of work, we have festival, we can press Control D, and I can duplicate and place snow Dorman. But here, in this case, I'm going to place something a little bit different. So in this area, we'll place s star. So I will click here. I will select the star tools, and on the star tools, we will reduce the number of corner because it is a stars, and we will work with five. I need to re click here to recpre the basic Information here, and I will press Control and I will place the summit on the top, just like this. And after I will reduce little bits of size. Then I will press Control D, and I will duplicate again, and then I will press Control D, and I will duplicate again on the right as well. So after to do this work, I have these swiss stars. I can place the first one where I want, the last one where I want, and then I select the Swiss stars to work with the haline and distribute panel. The Aline and distribute panel to the first selected, I can define center on horizontal axis and here distribute horizontally with even horizontal gaps, just like that. After that, we can go right click Wal Morton to Crato Group to be able to address the positions, and I will scale a little bit. Maybe we can reduce a little bit this area. The aim is to perfectly position the elements. So for example, food center I can place here and I can adjust little bit the positions, and I will check center. Then Sunday market, I think location is pretty good. We can place here, and I can adjust center on vertical xis. Then we have festivals. We can place festival around here, and maybe I can scale a little bit festivals and I can center on vertical xis as well. After I have these different stars here, maybe I can increase the size place around here, and I can center as well, just like that. And that's it. This is just an example about what we can do. I'm going to The interesting thing, as you can see, here we have worked with the red color. So we have multiple elements. You can try this logo also with other types of colors. Here, I decided to focus only on one color, one more time, as I explained, when you create a logo generally, you need to work with a contrast between two colors, but sometimes you can work with multiple colors, but generally focus on only two colors. And this is the way to work generally. Maybe you can increase a little bit on the market, and I will check one more time to center positions. The swi stars, maybe you can increase a little bit more and I will check the center position. So we'll select all the elements of the logo. Select all. I will go right click and I will generate a group as well. And now we have the freedom to resize so we can resize Eyes we want if we need, as you can see, hoops. I think I break little bits of proportion, be careful to press control to perfectly keep the right proportion. But for the rest, you can resize your group. So it means your logo, in this case, at your convenience, and you can press Control to just check to keep the same ratio. And I will center. I will click here center and center and it's okay for this logo. So as you can see, another interesting training. So one more time, different type of things. You need to master the shapes, you need to master the aligment and distribution. You need also to master the colors. You need to master the Bolan operation to be able to concretely craft the right things. So it's okay 67. Logo city part 1: In this training, we are going to create a logo, and for this, it will be a logo, and for this one, we call this city. For the simple reason we will create different type of element. And for this, we will work with transformation. We work with Bolan operation as well, different types of colors and different types of operation. Oh, first things to do I will zoom a little bit on this area. I will create a rectangles. And we'll create a first rectangle here. I will define a color, and I will define a color like this type of red color first. And I will go on this area. We'll move a little bit here, and I will go on pass, we convert object to pass to where did the sharp point. And then double click and I will select this sharp point, I will dragging and moving. Don't forget to press Control to stay on this axis, and we'll dragging and moving like this. Then we'll press Control D to duplicate and I will duplicate on the right. I will press Control to stay on the same axis, and we'll make something a little bit darker. And I will dragging and moving to extend a little bit on this area, and then we will flip and we will just snap here. To snap here, we can activate the snapping option on the top right corner, and then I can just move and snap just like this. So after to do this work, I will crate a rectangle. So we'll sect the rectangle tools, and we'll crator rectangle like this, and I will place rectangle will use a different color to crast some contrast just here. And after to do this type of work, we play the first rectangle. We need to play the first rectangle on the corner, just like that, and we try to duplicate sit times, and we need to let little bit space here. We press Control D, we'll press Control D again and Control D again. Yes. Ith like this, it's going to be pretty good for the space that we have between the different element. So we will select the first element here shift. Maybe we can extend a little bit, but it's not extremely important. You can extend like this, but as I explained, it's not extremely important in this case. I will select four re tangle just like that. After to select the four rectangles, I will go on the right here and after to go on the right, I will go on this panel fill and stroke, and we can open directly in the object panels so hing and distribute panels. Object halin and distribute. Then in the Alingen distribute, we will align to the first selected. And to the first selected, we can align to the base ling bottom edge, and at the same time, we can have the same space with the distribute horizontally with even horizontal gaps. Then we can select this different element, this different blue rectangle to go and pass and we'll select union. So thanks to that, we have only one entity. After I can select the different rectangle, select the element on the back. So we have another pass on the back. So we select the pass on the back, we select the union element just like this. So this rectangle and this rectangle convert it to pass, and we can go and pass and we can select intersection. And thanks to that, I can obtain this random. So now we can select these two element. We can cry to group, so I will go right click, I will cry to group, and I can scale little bit around this area. Maybe we can adjust little bit on this area as well. Then I will press Control D on this group and I will duplicate. So I will press Control D. We can duplicate the group. And I will scale the group on this direction, and I will scale the group more on this area as well. And we will reduce maybe a little bit to size. Let's do something like this. And then I will press Control D again and I will duplicate again and we will scale a little bit this one, and we will make something smaller just here. Then something that we will do, we can select the sue groups. I will go on here, we have this one ling and distribute. And with the first selected, I will select this base. Maybe this one we can scale a little bit more and I can scale a little bit more this group. I can deactivate the snapping option and we scale a little bit more and I will place around here. And this one I will move a little bit around this area. So now what I need to do, maybe this one is a little too big. Let's just reduce a little bit. What I need to do I need to create a space here, we see the rectangle tools, and we need to create a small rectangles on this area, as you can see. So you create a rectangle, I need to recuperate the snapping options and we can snap on this area. So we can snap just like this. And I will extend until here. So after to do this type of work, I will duplicate this rectangle as well. I will press Control D, we place another one here, and it is the same way. I need to adjust little bit this rectangle like that, and I will press Control D to place this rectangle here as well. And we need to snap one more time. So you need to zoom and you need to snap. Here, it's strange because the snapping option is not going to work properly. I just zoom here and the snapping option is not going to work properly in this type of case. Maybe I can do something like this, corner pass. Yes, now it's going to work, and now it's going to be okay. The problem is we need to let's work first on first, we will work on the left. So first, we'll work on this one. I will click on this rectangle and shift, I will click on this rectangle, this one, and we'll go on pass and I will select difference, just like that. The problem is with a group, so it's not going to work properly. So I need to select this one, and we need to ungroup first, and I need to select this one and to ungroup first as well. We'll ungroup all these different element. Now I will select this rectangle, so this one shift the blue rectangle and I will go and pass and we select difference. And thanks to that, I can create this element. After to do this type of work, I will go here, and I need to adjust and sharp one. I will go and pass and I will select object to pass. And I will click here, pass Object to pass. And thanks to that, we can double click. We can dragging and moving this sharp point here and this sharp point like this. And here we'll do the same type of thing, this sharp point, and we can snap here, and we can snap here as well. And now it's going to work. So now we can select the blue rectangles with the adjustment and this red rectangle and we can go and pass difference. And we can select this blue rectangle again. I think I'm going to adjust. M I think I'm going to adjust. Let's select all this element, just like this, all this element. And let's move a little bit more on inside. So I will move a little bit more inside, I will press Control, and let's do I would like to be, yes, more like this. I need to adjust. I think it's going to be pretty good. So I will select this base, this rectangle, this blue rectangle, just like this, I will go on pass difference I will use this one, shift and this blue rectangle, pass and difference again. And thanks to that, we can obtain this render. Then I will just change the color. So on this area, we can change the color. We'll go in the panels, these panels. Now we change the color, maybe I will put this type of blue color, and I will select this one will select a darker blue color. And then we'll click on this one. We'll select something more like a gray color, but maybe little bit gray, and I think we can work a little bit with green gray color like maybe this one, just like this. And I will select another one, and I will make something a little bit darker, like, for example, this one. And that's it. So here we have our base, as you can see, and it's perfect. We can select all the elements. We can go right click, we can try to group, scale a little bit and center our group on the page in the center like this. 68. Logo city part 2: We're going to continue with this logo. And for this, we have created this element, as you can see, and we add more elements. So I will create circles, and I will select the circle tools. We create a circle. We can press control on this area, and this circle will change the color first. I will go on these panels, and I will define the black color. Then we can play the circle around here, maybe just like this. And after to place the circle, I can use alignment panels and play this in the center. Then we will select these tools and we'll create another circle just here. And on this area, we will define ano der color, like the red color first. And we'll increase little bit of size just like this. And the aim is to place this circle in the center just like this. I will deactivate the snapping options, and we'll create something like a ring, but I need to address the proportion. So what we can do, we can place the circle close to I think this area will be pretty good and something that we can do it is to use Aigan distribute and one more time I can center. So now what we will do, we'll select these two circles just like that, and we will go on the pass option here, and we will select difference. And thanks to that, we can crat something like a ring here. I'm going to play this ring on the front. We'll click here, raise selection to top, and we'll obtain this render. Then I will increase little bit of size just like this. And the aim is to reduce just on this area and we can adjust like this. I can adjust like this on this area and I can adjust like this as well. So the aim is to try to create something like this, just here. I just adjust a little bit. We need to have this summit here, this summit here. And yes, I think we can align to center and you can move a little bit more, and here dragging and moving more. Let's take a look. And yes, just like that. So after to do this type of work, what we need to do we need to create a cut. So first, we will align the element in the center and we'll create a rectangle. We will work with the slapping option again, and we create a rectangle just like this. And this rectangle will use a different color. We use, for example, any type of color, let's just use this green color. And I will snap here, and we need to snap on the right just like this to create to cut on the ring. So we'll create a rectangle just like this. And what we need to do, we need to select this rectangle, shift this ring, this element with a union, and we need to go on pass and we can select difference. So thanks to that, as you can see, what we have, we will obtain something like this. So as you can see, we'll obtain something like this. And in this case, I will just come back here like that. So as you can see, it's pretty good. We can obtain this render. So now what we will do we just add little bit text just below. First, we can select all this element, and we can go right click, we can create two groups. And if we want to scale the groups, we can adjust as you can see. And we have all the base of our logo just like that. After to do this type of work, I will play the element. I will scale little bit, and I will align and distribute center, and we will click on the text tools. And with the text tool, we'll go Left click here. I will just tap city and I will select the element and what color we will use. We will use in these panels, we use the black colors. I will increase little bits of size just like this. I'm going to make something simple. Not many take just one element of text. We can double click. We have different type of font families that we can use one more time. I'm going to use a simple font family that we can use a lot. It is a caliber font family. You have different font families that we can use. In this case, let's make something simple and we will use caliber. The caliber font family, you have different type of way. So normal font family is little bit, it's not enough strong, so I will reinforce little bit with the bul value. And for this, I will select bold. And after that, we can put city just below, not something too big, maybe just like this. And I can reduce a little bit more and it's going into work perfectly, and we can play this one around here. So after to do this type of work, we will select all the element just like this and we can go right click to create a complete group. First, before we need to check the location. So I will select all this group, and in the ligan panels, I will check center. And I will select city. In the alignment panels, I will select center as well. Now we can select all the group like this, all the elements. And I will go right click, I will write two groups, and that's it. We have the creation of this logo. So now what we can do, we can dragging and moving. We will keep the quality one more time because we work with this format, and this is why it's perfect when you want to crack logo. You won't lose any quality thanks to this format. So I will play the logo here. I will scale little bit around this area. I think it's pretty better to increase little bit the size. And after installing and distribute panels, you can perfectly center to the page and you can click Center on vertical axis and center on horizontal axis, and this is the creation of this logo. So it's okay. So as you can see, very interesting to work with the different operation. Here, we have seen different type of Bolanoperation, and as you can see, it's extremely interesting to master this different Boland operation to be able to create this type of elements. 69. Logo ocean part 1: In this training, we're going to create a logo, and for this we create a logo for the aim of this logo will be Ocean, and we will create a circle. We will work with the blue colors, and we will add different elements like shapes and we will add a text also. So the first thing that I'm going to do for this logo, it is to create a circle. So we sell the circle tools, and with create a circle, we need to press control to keep the proportion of the circles, and then we will play the circle here. I will scale a little bit of circle, I will place in the center here, and we can just choose a blue color. I will go in the fill and stroke value, and I will change the blue color. We'll select a blue color around this area. You want to have exactly the same blue color, you just check the number that we have here and you replace this number to have exactly the same color. So after to do this work, I will zoom a little bit, I will select the rectangle tool. And we'll create something like a but symbol. And to create a butt symbol, I will first create a rectangle. We will use a white color just like this, and I will play the rectangle in the midl and I will scale little bit. Then I will create another rectangle to use as a guide, and we will select the red color. We'll put this on the top, just like this. We will scale a little bit this rectangle, just like that. And after to scale this rectangle, I will use the second one. We will increase little bit side and the second one, I will convert with a pass. I will go on pass object to pass, double click, and I would set this handle and I can exchange here and I can extend here to create this type of things. Then we can use this one and we have two possibility. I can remove if I need and cratondar one, but I could scale also this one. I will cratonodor one, we put another one here. And this one will reduce little bit on this area, we select the white color as well, and I will snap on this area just like that. And I need to snap in the mid. So after to do this work, I will press Control D, I will duplicate, and I will scale this one again. We'll put another one, small one on the top, just like this. And after that, I will press maybe we can adjust a little bit on this direction, just like this. And center, and I will press Control D again. We'll place a small one on the left, I need to scale on this area. And I need to put this in the center. It's important to have the snapping option stam. It's a little bit difficult. So if it's difficult, you need to put the rectangle outside and you need to move again, and thanks to that, you can snap. I will press Control D to duplicate and put another one on the other area. Then I will take the rectangle tool, we cratoRctangle, and I will click on this area, but this rectangle, I would like to have the same proportion. So I will delete first. I will crack another one, and I will press on this area, I would like to keep the ratio, so I will press Control, and I would like to keep the ratio, yes, just like this. And I will use the red color. I will place this one around here. We will scale little bit this one, and I will place around this area, and I will press Control D, and I will play this one around this area. And after to do that, I will select the two rectangles and I will just move in the Md end to cra groups or right click to group, and after that, we can open the object panels, haline and distribute panels in the halin and distribute panels, we can use center to page. Were these two elements. I will go right click here and I will ungroup. So after to ungroup, what we can do, we can just remove this element from the rectangle on the back. So I'll see the rectangle on the back, shift I will select these two rectangle on the front, and I will go on pass and I will select difference. The problem is, as you can see, it's not going to work because we have three objects selected. So I will select the first rectangle. I will select this first square, and I will go in the pass, I will select difference, and now it's going to work. And I will select the rectangle again. Shift, I will select this square, and I will go and pass and we will select difference again. Oh, thanks to that, we can create like these but symbols. So now we need to select a different element, and all these different element, we will create a union. I will select this rectangle, shift this union element, shift this one, shift this one, and shift this one. We'll create a union with pass, and we will select here union. We can also create to group. It depends what we want to do. In this case, yes, maybe we'll create union, but in some case, we can only create a group. In this case, I will create a union. And as you can see, I just have one entity, and I can use this as a symbol. It depends about what you want to do. If you really think that you will edit this element, maybe you can only create a group. But if you are sure that you can just use this element and you want edit, maybe you can create a union. It depends about what you want to do. Group or union, group or union, in this case, we select union. I will scale little bit, and I will play this one around here with maybe this type of size. And in many logo, we can create a symbol depending on the situation to represent what we want to create. I will click on this symbol. I will go in the ling and distribute panels, and I will define center. Then if you want to move, you can move the symbol here. You just need to press Control and with control, you can stay on this axis. And every time if you want to check, just go on this area and you can check center for example. This is an example about what we can do. So after that, we'll add text, and we will add more element as well. 70. Logo ocean part 2: We're going to continue with this logo. So for this, we have created these circles as you can see, and at the same time, we have created this element. We'll select the rectangle tools. We'll create rectangles around here, and I will create two rectangles. First one here, this is a Midle point, as you can see. So we'll go a little bit below the Midle point, we zoom here and we will go little bit below, just like that. And we'll create a space around maybe this space. And I will press Control D again and we will duplicate to place another one little bit more smaller, and I will play this one just here. Maybe you can reduce ile bit this one and reduce ile bit more this one, reduced it bit of space. Yes, I think something like this, it will be pretty good. Maybe it's too, I can adjust again. Yes, just like that. So after to do this work, I will create boolean operation. This one is too small, I will increase a little bit more. I will create a boolean operation, I will select the circles shift, I will select the red rectangle, and we'll go on pass, we will select we select difference, yes. And I will select the circles, and I will select the second rectangle just like this, and I will go on pass and we'll use difference again. And thanks to that, we can create this type of things. And maybe we can adjust little bit because I want to, yes. I want to have a little bit more space here. So maybe we can move a little bit this one on this area, and let's six the circle and the rectangle again pass difference. Yeah, I think like this is pretty better. Now, what we will do, we add little bit content. So first, I will sick my symbol, and I will drag and moving the symbol here will scale a little bit more, and I will play the symbol here. We'll create no direct tangle, we create andirect tangle just like this. And this rectangle we can just place in the midle. We can usual distribute panels midals. And as you can see, we need to cover this type of area. After to do this type of work, I will scale a little bit, I will press Control D, and I will dragging and moving these rectangles also in the mider. But this one will reduce a little bit and we'll make something we cover a little bit less area. So I'll take this rectangle and select the circle just here, and we'll go on the pass, and this time we will use what different type of options. And what option we use will use division. And thanks to that, I can recuperate only this part. We can go in the fill and strop panels and we can make something a little bit darker, as you can see, just like that. And we'll do the same thing on this area. I will click on this one. I will move a little bit more, just like this, and I will select the rectangle and the circle pass. I will select divisions, and I will click on this one, and we'll recuperate this blue color as well. Let's take a look. I think it's a little too big. Because a little too big, I will move a little bit more here, and I will select the circle and the rectangle, I will go and pass, and I will select divisions, and thanks to that, I can recuperate this element, and I can recuperate the blue color. I need to make something a little bit smaller on this area that this area. Then we'll add some text, and for this, we'll click on the text tool, we'll go here, and I will tape Oh, and I will select all the text and we will work with the white color. Then we'll increase a little bit of size. About the font family, we have multiple types of font family. I will double click, and in this case, I will keep this font family. So in this case, we will just keep the caliber font family. I will use the calibre font family, and for the calibre font family as well, we will work on the value caliber bold, and I will place Ocean here. I will scale a little bit ocean, we with Alina distribute panels, and we'll select center. And then we'll add few stars. I will click on the startols and here we have different type of stars that we can create. We'll define five corners, and the spoke ratio will be 0.5. I will go on this area. We can press Control to have the summit in the right position like this one, and I will create a first star. Then we'll scale little bit stars. At this moment, we can deactivate the snapping option. It will be pretty better. So I have this star, I will put something like this size, and I will press Control D, and I will duplicate one on the left and press Control D and duplicate one on the right. So after to do this type of work, I need to adjust my star. So I will select the first one shift, the second one shift, the third one, and I will go into Allinn distribute panels, and I will distribute horizontally with even horizontal gap, this one. And we will use this one center on horizontal axis as well. Depending relative to, we have different options, the biggest object, all the objects of the same size here, so it's going to work perfectly. Then I will go right click and I will create two groups, and this group, I can dragging and moving and put the position of the eight. And after for the wide, I will go inhaling and distribute and we can center on the vertical axis. I will zoom a little bit, and that's it. This is just how we can create this type of logo. Then we can select all the element. We can go right click, we can create complete group one more time. And as you can see, we can scale the logo because we work with this type of format. As I explained before, it's pretty convenient with this format for logo because you can resize, you can propose the logo in different type of format, and the quality will stay the same for the simple reasons that we work with this type of format. And I will go into Alina distribute panels. I will see Center and I will see Center again. And after that, we'll go around here. And it's okay for this logo. 71. Logo fitness part 1: In this training, we're going to create a logo for fitness, and it will be interesting training to see different features. So the title of this logo is a logo for fitness. And for this something that I will do, we will work with different circles. We will create symbols. We will also work with text, and we will work with the alignment and the distribution. And the main color of this logo will be the red in contrast with white color. The first things to do we click on the circle tools, and I will create a circle here, and I will press Control to perfectly keep the proportion of this circle. And we place the circle in the milder, we can activate the snapping options and just play the circle in the milder. So after to do this work, I will create another one. I will click here, I will change the color first, and I will press Control. I will create another circle. This circle I will place in the Midols as well, just like this. We can press shift and control to scale a little bit more the circle in the Midols and we can check that we are perfectly in the mydal. And we'll apply another red color. First, I will click on this red color. And as you can see, we put these red colors, and I will click on this one and this one will put another type of red color, little bit different. Maybe I can select this one, but I will go on the option here. We can adjust little bits of color and I will selt maybe think this one. So, after to do this work, we zoom a little bit, and we will create a rectangle. So I will craatetngle here, small rectangles, and we will put in the stroke pin options. We will activate hoops, stroke, no stroke, feel white color, and I will zoom a little bit. So the aim is to create a symbol here. I will first define my rectangle, like, for example, around this area, and we will place in the center. First, I will deactivate the slapping option or I will be a little bit in trouble, and I will press I will create an directangle directly. It will be pretty better just on the side, just like this. And I will play the second rectangles around here. We will adjust a little bit. We will scale on these directions. And after to do this work, I will double click, and I will just adjust with a the orner just like this. I will press Control D to duplicate. We will go around this area and we will scale around here and we will double click to adjust the rounded corner. And we will press Control D again, and I will move this one on the left. Double click. Oops, first, I will scale. I will scale a little bit on these directions. Maybe this one we can increase a little bit more. This one we can increase a little bit more, and this one reduce a little bit more. I think like this, it's convenient. I just need to double click to adjust the rounded corner. Here, I will adjust the rounded corner and here I will adjust the rounded corner. So now we'll upturn this winder. What I will do, I will play some space here before to work with alignment and distributions. And first, I will select this swill rectangle on the left, and I will press Control D to duplicate and we will go on the right just like this and I will just invert. To invert, we create a symmetry, flip selected object horizontally, and we will play this element around here. I think it's a little too close. Let's move a little bit, move a little bit, and move a little bit, move a little bit here. So now I need to work with the right distribution. We can for this open the panels object, halign and distribute panels. We can now go on the right, and I will select all this rectangle. I will create a frame of selection here, select all the rectangles. And relative to the last selected, what we can do, we can use center on horizontal axis, and I will be able to use distribute horizontally with even horizontal gap, just like that. Now what I can do, I can create a group, so I will go right click here and I will create a group. And now, as you can see, we can create this type of symbols. Now we have a group and we can adjust the position of the group. This will be the main symbol. If you want to resize this group, you need to really be careful to to play this in the center, you can scale, so it means I can scale. And if I scale, I need to perfectly press control if I want to a proportion. Were we are going to position the symbols. First, I will come back here in this panel, so we have a group. If you want to rename, we can rename, but I think we can just stay like this and you can just press, for example, control, and we can scale. So we'll increase. Let's make something it'll bit bigger around this size. I think like this it's pretty good, and I just need to center my element. So we're going to alignment panels. We can also activate the snapping option, but in this case, the alignment and distribute panel will be pretty good, and I will just click on this area to center on the vertical axis. So maybe we can adjust little bit to red color. I will click here. I will come back to the color. We can make something maybe a little bit darker. It depends. Maybe we can make something a little bit darker here or this color. And for this one, maybe we can make something a little bit darker as well to create a little bit more contrast. So I will click here. Let's make something a little bit more darker again. Maybe I think this one will be pretty good and the other one with this color just like this. So it's okay for that. We'll come back to these panels, and after we'll add some text and element. 72. Logo fitness part 2: We're going to continue with this logo. We have seen how to create these different elements of this logo with the circles and also this group. What we're going to do, we're going to add text. And for this, I will click on the text tool just here and we will go left click on this area and I can tap some text. First, I will adjust because I think it's a little bit, I will tap over limit. And after to tap over limit, I will double click here and we will adjust the colors. So how to adjust the color, we will go on the options here and we define the wise color, and I will select a font family. And I would like to select this font family Franklin Gotti heavy. It is a heavy font family, and I think it will correspond perfectly for what I want to do for this logo. Then we will click on the selection tool will scale a little bit with control, and I will place over limit around here close to the Mdals. We can use the ligan panels one more time, and we will align directly on the vertical axis. Then what we will, we will press Control D, and after to press Control D, I will put this one here, I will scale a little bit, and we will double click and we'll tape Jim. So I will tape gym here, and after to tape gym, will place this one around the Midor just like that. So we'll have over limit, as you can see, we can scare a little bit more, and we can place one more time in the center. I will go in the Aline and distribute panels, and I will go in the center. We duplicate one more time. I will duplicate gym, I will press Control D, and I will place this one here. Then I will radiate litter and we will tape fitness center. So I will tape fitness center. And after to do this work, I will go around this area and I will scale little bit just here. And after that, we will place fitness center around this area. I think it's pretty good. So now what I would like to have, I would like to add two stars on the left here and on the right here. So for this, we can select the star tools here. So it means these tools. We can define a number of corners, and I will just define five corners. Spoke ratio at 0.5, and we'll go left click here and we can create a star. I just need to put summit yes on this area and then we will go here. Will scale a little bit, place this one around this area. Maybe it's a little too big. I will reduce a little bit, and I will press Control D to duplicate and have this on the right. So now is to work with the right distribution. I think we can increase a little bit more the size of over limit, and maybe we can increase a little bit more the size of gym as well. Oh, let's just double click and double click here, it is a little bit smaller. It's pretty good. So now what I will do, I will work with the alignment and the distribution. I select a position for this one here, and I will select gem with shift, and I will select this second stars we shift as well. We'll go into line and distribute panels, and in the line and distribute panels, we can select relative to the last selected. And what we would do we will use this one center on horizontal axis. And I will complete with a distribution. We will use this one, distribute horizontally with even horizontal gaps, and I will just validate like that. Now if I want to center all I want to create a group, I need to create two groups so I will go right click here, and I will crate to group, and now I will be able to center the group. So now what is the aim? The aim is to position perfectly in the midle element and to try to have the right disposition. Concretely, I will select my symbol. The symbol maybe we can put a little bit more on the top, just like this. After we can have over limit, maybe I can put this little bit more on the top as well, just like that. Oops, maybe it's too high. I think here, it will be pretty better. Now we can have this group. So this group maybe we can place around here. And now we are fitness center, maybe I can stay like this. Maybe this one around here. I can center all my element. Will click on this one, and I will check that everything is center center on the page. I will click on this one, center on the page. I will click on this group, center on the page, and I will click on Feds Center center on the page. I will check at the same time this circle, center center, and this circle center center. The interesting way with this type of logo is you can change the color and take a look about how it will be. For example, I can divide and I can try maybe with a blue color. So maybe try with this one. And this one maybe some different type of blue color. And thanks to that, we can introduce the logo in different type of way. I can select this one and I can try dart maybe some green color, just like that. And I can click on this one and another type of green color. But I think the choice here, the red color will be pretty good because I think the blue is not very interesting. We don't have too much contrast here. So definitely, I think the red color will be the best. So I will click on this area. We recuperate some red color, and let's make something little bit darker like this. And at the same time, I will click on the circle inside. We will select again the red color like this one, and we can just adjust little bits of transparency just like this. And maybe we can, yes, use Pinker on this one will be pretty good. Here. And that's it. We can select all the logo, all the element of the logo, Crato group, and one more time. After to do this type of work, you can resize on your page, you can scale, and we will keep perfectly the proportion. You can go into element panels, define center, and center, and it's okay for this logo overnJimHtness Center. So we are finished with this logo.